JVC Stereo System UX QD9S User Manual

MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM  
UX-QD9S  
Consists of CA-UXQD9S and SP-UXQD9S  
For hiding the demonstration  
display, refer to page 15.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1220-005A  
[A]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION — Proper Ventilation  
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage, locate the apparatus as follows:  
Top/Front/Back/Sides: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.  
Bottom:  
Place on the level surface. Maintain adequate air path for ventilation by placing on  
a stand with a height of 10 cm more.  
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation.  
Front view  
Side view  
Main unit  
15cm  
1cm  
1cm  
15cm  
15cm  
Main unit  
15cm  
Wall or  
obstructions  
Front  
10cm  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
marks refer to operation used frequently. You can quickly learn the general usage of this  
product by reading those parts only.  
Introduction  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
..............................................  
Notes on Operation ............................. 3  
19  
Suitable Locations for the Main Unit.................  
Condensation....................................................  
Cleaning the Main Unit .....................................  
Listener’s Etiquette ...........................................  
Playable Disc Types .........................................  
Disc Structure ...................................................  
Selecting the Color System ..............................  
3
3
3
3
4
5
6
Setting the AM Tuner Spacing...................19  
Selecting a Radio Station ..........................20  
Storing Radio Stations (Preset) .................20  
Tuning In to a Preset Radio Station...........20  
Listening to Discs  
Special Cautions.................................. 7  
Notes on Handling ............................................  
Supplied Accessories .......................................  
7
7
Basic Operations of the DVD Player ...21  
Playback ................................  
21  
Playing Back from a Position 10 Seconds  
Preparation  
Before (One Touch Replay)...................23  
Part Description................................... 8  
Stopping Playback................. 24  
Resuming Playback (RESUME) ................24  
Pausing Playback ......................................24  
Advancing Picture Frame by Frame ..........24  
Fast Reverse/Fast Forward  
Remote Control ................................... 9  
Inserting Batteries into the Remote  
Control................................................... 9  
Operating the TV Using the Remote  
Search...............................  
24  
Control...................................................10  
Slow Motion Playback................................25  
Skipping to the Beginning of  
Connections.........................................11  
Connecting the Antennas ..........................11  
Connecting the Speakers ..........................13  
Connecting Other Equipment ....................14  
Connecting with a TV.................................14  
When a Clearer Picture Is Desired ............15  
Connecting the Power Plug .......................15  
a Track...............................  
25  
Skipping to the Beginning of a Track with  
the Number Buttons...............................25  
Selecting a Track from the Menu Screen ..25  
Convenient Functions of the DVD  
Player ................................................26  
Selecting the Audio................  
26  
Basic Operations  
Selecting the Subtitle.................................27  
Selecting a View Angle..............................27  
Magnifying the Picture (ZOOM).................27  
Adjusting the Picture Quality (VFP) ...........28  
Creating Realistic Sound (3D PHONIC) ....28  
Adjusting Playback Level (DVD LEVEL)....29  
Enjoying Better Pictures  
Basic Operations .................................16  
Setting the Clock........................................16  
Turning On/Off the Main Unit.  
Adjusting the Volume.............  
Temporarily Turning Off the Sound  
(FADE MUTING) ...................................17  
Emphasizing Heavy Bass Sound  
17  
17  
(PROGRESSIVE) ..................................29  
Playing Back the Bonus Group..................30  
Browsable Still Pictures (B.S.P.)................30  
Playing Back the Disc in the Desired Order  
(Program Playback)...............................31  
Random Playback......................................32  
Repeat Playback........................................33  
(AHB PRO)............................................17  
Adjusting the Sound Quality ......................17  
Changing the Color Patterns for  
the Display Window and Disc Tray........18  
Status Bar and Menu Bar....................34  
Using the Status Bar and Menu Bar ..........34  
Playing Back the Designated Part  
Repeatedly (A-B Repeat Playback).......35  
Designate the Time (Time Search)............35  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG  
Reference  
Discs..................................................36  
Playback ....................................................36  
Repeat Playback........................................37  
Handling Discs/Cassette Tapes ..........52  
Disc Messages....................................53  
Troubleshooting...................................53  
Specifications ......................................54  
Preferences .........................................38  
Basic Operations .......................................38  
LANGUAGE...............................................38  
PICTURE...................................................38  
AUDIO .......................................................39  
OTHERS....................................................39  
Country/Area Codes............................40  
Language Codes .................................41  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
..............................................  
42  
Listening to Other Equipment  
Listening to Other Equipment..............43  
Adjusting the Sound Input Level from  
Other Equipment ...................................43  
Recording Sound  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
..............................................  
44  
Quitting Recording.....................................45  
Recording Only One Track from a Disc.....45  
Recording the Second or Subsequent  
Track to the Last Track from a Disc.......45  
Program Recording from a Disc ................45  
Recording with No Blank Time between  
Tracks....................................................45  
Erasing Recorded Sound from  
a Cassette Tape....................................45  
Convenient Functions  
Using the Timers .................................46  
Sleep Timer ...............................................46  
Recording Timer ........................................47  
Playback Timer..........................................48  
Auto Standby.......................................50  
Disc Ejection Lock ...............................50  
Using AV COMPU LINK ......................51  
Connection and Setting .............................51  
Operations .................................................51  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Introduction  
Notes on Operation  
Suitable Locations for the  
Main Unit  
Cleaning the Main Unit  
When the operation panel becomes dirty, dust it  
with a soft dry cloth. When the operation panel is  
very dirty, wipe it with a cloth dampened with a  
small amount of a neutral detergent, and then wipe  
it with a soft dry cloth.  
To minimize the need for servicing and maintain  
the high quality of this product, do not place the  
main unit in the following locations:  
• In a position subject to high humidity or consid-  
erable dust  
CAUTION  
• On an uneven or unstable surface  
• Near a heat source  
• Near a computer, fluorescent light or other elec-  
tric appliance  
• Do not wipe the operation panel with thinners, ben-  
zenes or other chemical agents. Do not spray  
insecticides onto the operation panel. These may  
cause discoloration and damage to the surface.  
• In a small room with insufficient ventilation  
• In a position exposed to direct sunlight  
• In a position exposed to excessive cold  
• In a position exposed to strong vibration  
• Near a TV, other amplifier, or tuner  
• Near a magnetic source  
Listener's Etiquette  
When using headphones, keep the volume at a  
moderate level so as not to over-stimulate your  
ears.  
CAUTION  
When enjoying sound from the speakers,  
adjust the volume to a suitable level to  
avoid disturbing your neighbors.  
• The operating temperature of this product is 5°C to  
35°C. Use in temperatures outside this range may  
cause a malfunction or damage the product.  
Even low-volume sound carries a long way,  
especially at night. Show consideration to  
your neighbors by closing windows or using  
headphones.  
Condensation  
Under the following conditions, you may not be  
able to operate this product properly due to con-  
densation formed on the lens of the main unit:  
• When you have just started an air conditioner to  
warm your room  
• When you have placed the main unit at an area  
with high humidity  
• When you have moved the main unit from a cold  
place to a warm place  
When condensation forms, leave the main unit  
turned on, wait for approximately 1 or 2 hours, and  
then operate the main unit.  
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP Lossless", and the double-D symbol are trade-  
marks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• "DTS" and "DTS 2.0+DIGITAL OUT" are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• On some DVD VIDEOs, DVD AUDIOs, VCDs  
or SVCDs, their actual operation may be dif-  
ferent from what is explained in this manual.  
This is due to the disc programming and disc  
structure, not a malfunction of this product.  
Playable Disc Types  
This product has been designed to play back the  
following discs:  
DVD VIDEO, DVD AUDIO, VCD, SVCD, CD  
This product can also play back the following  
discs:  
• Finalized DVD-R/RW discs recorded in the DVD  
VIDEO format.  
About CD-Rs/CD-RWs  
You can play back a CD-R/CD-RW only  
when the disc is finalized.  
• CD-R/RW discs recorded in the following for-  
mats  
- Music CDs (finalized discs)  
- VCDs  
- SVCDs  
- MP3/WMA/JPEG discs recorded in ISO 9660 (for  
details, refer to "About MP3/WMA/JPEG discs")  
However, some discs may not be played back  
because of their disc characteristics, recording  
conditions, or damage or stain on them.  
Only sounds can be played back from the following  
discs:  
You can play back a CD-R/CD-RW which  
has been recorded in the audio CD for-  
mat and a CD-R/CD-RW to which audio  
data (MP3/WMA) or a still picture data  
(JPEG) file is recorded.  
However, playback is impossible in some  
cases due to the disc characteristics,  
recording condition, scratches or dirt on  
the disc, or dirt or condensation on the  
lens.  
• Before using a CD-R/CD-RW, carefully  
read the cautions regarding the disc.  
• This product does not support playback  
or CD text display of sound files such as  
MP3s.  
To play back a CD-RW on this product,  
erase all tracks if the CD-RW was  
recorded in a format other than the audio  
CD format. Using the CD-RW without  
erasing all tracks may result in damage to  
the speakers or other parts caused by  
sudden loud volume.  
MIX-MODE CD  
CD-EXTRA  
CD-G  
CD TEXT  
Discs you can play:  
Region  
Code  
Number*  
Video  
Format  
Disc Type  
Mark (Logo)  
DVD  
VIDEO  
PAL/  
NTSC  
4/ALL  
DVD  
AUDIO  
PAL/  
NTSC  
VCD  
Discs that cannot be played back  
PAL/  
NTSC  
• The following discs cannot be played back:  
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (recorded in  
VR format), CD-ROM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo  
CD, SACD, etc.  
Playing back these discs will generate noise and  
damage the speakers.  
• Damaged discs and discs in an extraordinary  
shape (other than a disc of 12 cm or 8 cm in  
diameter) cannot be played back.  
SVCD  
CD  
CD-R  
• JVC do not guarantee the operation and sound  
quality of discs not authorized by CD-DA, which  
is a CD specification.  
CD-RW  
Before playback, confirm that the disc complies  
with this CD specification by checking the marks  
and reading notes printed on the package.  
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
* Note on Region Code  
DVD players and DVD VIDEOs have their own  
region code numbers. This product can only play  
back a DVD VIDEO recorded with the region  
code number and video format mentioned  
above.  
Examples:  
If a DVD VIDEO with an improper region code  
number is loaded, "REGION CODE ERROR!"  
appears on the TV screen and playback cannot  
start.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Notes on Operation  
About MP3/WMA/JPEG discs  
Disc Structure  
Playable MP3/WMA/JPEG discs and files  
• Discs recorded in the ISO 9660 format are play-  
able (except discs recorded in the "packet write"  
format (UDF format)).  
• Discs recorded in the multi-session format are  
also playable.  
• Files with an extension of ".mp3", ".wma", ".jpg"  
or ".jpeg" (extensions with uppercase and lower-  
case letters mixed are also acceptable) are play-  
able.  
DVD VIDEO  
A DVD VIDEO consists of "titles" and each title  
may be divided into "chapters".  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG discs and files  
• A disc may not be played back, or reading it may  
take a long time depending on its recording con-  
ditions or properties.  
• The time needed for reading varies with the num-  
ber of groups or tracks (files) recorded on the disc.  
• If a character other than single byte English  
characters is used in the file name of an MP3/  
WMA/JPEG file, the track/file name will not be  
displayed correctly.  
• The order of tracks/groups displayed on the  
MP3/WMA Control screen, and the order of files/  
groups displayed on the JPEG Control screen  
may be different from that of files/folders dis-  
played on PC's monitor screen.  
DVD AUDIO  
A DVD AUDIO consists of "groups" and each  
group may be divided into "tracks".  
Some discs include a "bonus group" that requires  
a password for playing (  
page 30).  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 1  
Track 2  
VCD/SVCD/CD  
VCD, SVCD and CD consist of "tracks".  
• In the case of MP3/WMA discs, since groups/  
tracks are played back in alphabetical order, an  
off-the-shelf MP3/WMA disc may be played back  
in an order different from that indicated on the  
label attached to the disc.  
In general, each track has its own track number.  
(On some discs, each track may also be further  
divided by indexes.)  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
• Playing back an MP3/WMA file including a still  
image may take a long time. The elapsed time is  
not displayed until playing back starts. If playing  
back starts, the elapsed time may not be dis-  
played correctly.  
• For an MP3/WMA file, a disc with a sampling fre-  
quency of 44.1 kHz and transmission rate of 128  
kbps is recommended.  
MP3/WMA [JPEG] discs  
On an MP3/WMA [JPEG] disc, each still picture  
(material) is recorded as a track [file]. Tracks  
[Files] are usually grouped into a folder. Folders  
can also include other folders, creating hierarchical  
folder layers.  
This unit simplifies the hierarchical construction of  
a disc and manages folders by "groups".  
Up to 99 groups  
• This product is not compatible with MP3i or  
MP3PRO.  
• This product can play back a baseline JPEG file,  
excluding monochromatic JPEG files.  
• This product can play back JPEG data taken with a  
digital camera conforming to the DCF (Design  
Rule for Camera File System) standard (when a  
function is applied such as the automatic rotation  
function of a digital camera, data goes beyond the  
DCF standard, so the image may not be dis-  
played).  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Track 1 Track 2  
Group 3 Group 4 Group 5  
[File 1]  
[File 2]  
Up to 150 files  
• If data has been processed, edited and restored  
with PC image editing software, the data may  
not be displayed.  
This product can recognize up to 1 000 tracks  
[files] in a disc. Also, the product can recognize up  
to 150 tracks [files] per group and up to 99 groups  
in a disc. Since the unit ignores the tracks [files]  
whose numbers are exceeding 150 and the groups  
whose numbers are exceeding 99, they cannot be  
played back.  
• If there is any type of files other than MP3/WMA  
[JPEG] files in a disc, those tracks [files] are also  
counted in the total file number.  
• This product cannot play back animations such  
as MOTION JPEG, or still pictures (TIFF etc.)  
other than JPEG, and image data with sound.  
• The resolution of 640 x 480 pixels is recom-  
mended for JPEG files. If a file has been  
recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480  
pixels, display may take a long time. An image  
with a resolution of more than 8 192 x 7 680 pix-  
els cannot be displayed.  
• Files recorded on DVD-R/RW discs cannot be  
played back.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Color System  
This product is compatible with PAL and NTSC  
color systems.  
In standby mode, select PAL or NTSC to match  
your TV.  
If the VIDEO OUT SELECT switch is switched  
over when the power is on, turn off the power, and  
then turn it on again.  
• Before playing back a disc, it is also required to  
select the correct MONITOR TYPE in the  
PICTURE menu according to the aspect ratio of  
your TV (  
page 38).  
NOTE  
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set  
to "PAL", you can watch the playback pictures (the  
disc will be reproduced using "PAL 60" format), but  
the TV screen may rolls over upward and down-  
ward rapidly.  
NOTE  
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to  
"NTSC", you can watch the playback pictures, but  
the following symptoms may occur:  
• The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and  
be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.  
• The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from  
the original aspect ratio.  
• The picture movement is not smooth.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Special Cautions  
Avoid high temperatures  
Notes on Handling  
Do not expose the system to direct sunlight and do  
not place it near a heating equipment.  
Important cautions  
When you are away  
Installation of the system  
When away on travel or for other reasons for an  
extended period of time, disconnect the power  
cord plug from the wall outlet.  
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too  
hot nor too cold; between 5°C and 35°C.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the system  
and the TV.  
• Do not use the system in a place subject to  
vibration.  
Do not block the vents  
Blocking the vents may damage the system.  
Care of the cabinet  
When cleaning the system, use a soft cloth and fol-  
low the relevant instructions on the use of chemi-  
cally-coated cloths. Do not use benzene, thinner or  
other organic solvents including disinfectants.  
These may cause deformation or discoloring.  
Power cord  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands!  
• A small amount of power is always consumed  
while the power cord is connected to the wall  
outlet.  
• When unplugging the power cord from the wall  
outlet, always pull on the plug, not the power  
cord.  
If water gets inside the system  
Turn the system off and disconnect the power cord  
plug from the wall outlet, then call the store where  
you made your purchase. Using the system in this  
condition may cause fire or electrical shock.  
To prevent malfunctions of the system  
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If  
anything goes wrong, unplug the power cord and  
consult your dealer.  
When condensation or water drops adhere  
to the lens  
• Do not insert any metallic object into the system.  
• Do not use any non-standard shape disc (like a  
heart, flower or credit card, etc.) available on the  
market, because it may damage the system.  
• Do not use a disc with tape, stickers, or paste on  
it, because it may damage the system.  
In any of the following cases, condensation or  
water drops may adhere to the lens to prevent the  
system from working properly:  
• Immediately after roomheating starts  
• When the system is installed in a steamy or  
damp space  
• When the system is suddenly moved from a cold  
place to a warm space  
Label sticker  
In any of these cases, leave the system turned on  
for 1 or 2 hours before use.  
Sticker  
Supplied Accessories  
Paste  
Check to be sure you have all of the supplied  
accessories.  
The number in parentheses is the quantity of the  
pieces supplied. If anything is missing, contact  
your dealer immediately.  
Note about copyright laws  
Check the copyright laws in your country before  
recording from CDs. Recording of copyrighted  
material may infringe copyright laws.  
Remote control (1)  
Batteries (2)  
Safety precautions  
FM antenna (1)  
AM loop antenna (1)  
Video cord (1)  
Avoid moisture, water and dust  
Do not place the system in moist or dusty places.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights  
owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is  
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introcution/Preparation  
The numbers refer to the pages in which the parts are explained.  
Part Description  
18  
20  
21  
22  
17  
28  
42, 44  
30  
46-49 17  
50  
31-33  
21  
20  
42  
43  
Cassette holder: 42  
PUSH-OPEN  
17  
44  
28  
15, 18  
21  
17  
Remote control sensor: 9  
*
25, 30, 37, 45 24, 42  
Disc tray: 21  
* This terminal is for connecting a pair of headphones equipped with a stereo mini plug (not supplied). While  
the headphones are connected, the speakers do not produce any sound.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Preparation  
The numbers refer to the pages in which the parts are explained.  
Remote Control  
Inserting Batteries into the  
Remote Control  
17  
28  
17  
17  
10  
10  
20  
17  
18  
43  
42  
18  
21  
24  
10  
17  
10  
10, 16  
24, 42  
24, 42,  
47-49  
24, 25, 42  
R6P (SUM-3) /AA (15F)  
type dry-cell batteries (2)  
24, 42  
,
47-49  
25, 30,  
37, 45  
25  
25  
22, 25-28,  
30  
22, 25-28,  
30  
34  
50  
38  
46  
16, 47  
16  
23  
20, 47-49  
16, 20, 25,  
31, 35  
32  
42, 44  
33  
20, 31  
CAUTION  
• Do not use a used battery and a new battery  
together.  
• Do not use different types of batteries at the  
17  
17  
same time.  
27  
26  
27  
27  
Take out the batteries if the remote control is not  
to be used for a long time. Otherwise it may  
cause a leakage.  
23  
28, 29  
30  
29  
Remote control operation  
• When operating the remote control, point it at  
the front panel of the main unit.  
Opening the cover  
• The effective distance between the remote con-  
trol and the remote control sensor on the main  
unit is approximately 5 m maximum.  
• When the effective distance decreases, replace  
the batteries.  
• Do not drop the remote control or subject it to  
excessive shock.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0).  
This page is for when operating your TV using  
the remote control of this product.  
Examples:  
For a Hitachi TV: Press 1, then 0.  
For a Toshiba TV: Press 0, then 8.  
If there are two or more manufacturer's codes, try  
them in turn and select the one that causes the  
product to work properly.  
Operating the TV Using the  
Remote Control  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code  
01  
Manufacturer  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Code  
12  
Hitachi  
10  
13  
06  
07  
08  
09  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
02  
Sharp  
03  
Sony  
04, 11  
14  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
RCA  
05  
5 Release  
.
NOTE  
• The manufacturer's codes may be changed without  
notice. You may not be able to operate a TV  
produced by the manufacturer shown above.  
Number buttons  
For TV operation  
Operate the remote control by pointing it towards  
the TV.  
Turn on/off the power.  
Change channels.  
Setting the manufacturer's code  
1 Slide the remote control mode  
selector to the TV side.  
Adjust volume.  
2 Hold down  
.
-
/
/
Select channels.  
NOTE  
*1  
• Hold down  
until step 4 is completed.  
Change between the previously  
selected channel and the cur-  
rent channel.  
3 Press  
and release.  
Change between TV and video  
input.  
*1 Make sure to slide the remote control mode selector  
to the TV side in advance.  
NOTE  
• When the batteries are replaced, perform the  
manufacturer's code setting again.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
Connections  
Connecting the Antennas  
When radio reception with the supplied AM  
loop antenna is poor  
Connecting the AM antenna  
Vinyl-covered wire: 3 - 5 m  
(not supplied)  
1 Set up the AM antenna (supplied).  
Insert the tab into  
the slot.  
Twist together vinyl-  
covered wire and the AM  
loop antenna cord.  
Stretch out the vinyl-  
covered wire horizontally,  
preferably in a high place  
such as above a window  
or outdoors.  
Connect the AM loop  
antenna cord to the main  
unit together with the  
vinyl-covered wire.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
Main unit (side view)  
Main unit (rear view)  
Main unit (rear view)  
Connecting the antenna  
cord  
When insulation  
covers the tips of  
the antenna cord,  
twist and pull off  
the insulation.  
Connect the ends of  
the antenna cord as  
shown above.  
3 Turn the AM loop antenna to find  
the best position for radio  
reception.  
Place the AM loop antenna as far  
from the main unit as possible.  
• Do not place the AM loop antenna on a  
metallic table or close to a TV, computer, or  
other electric appliances. Doing so may  
affect radio reception.  
When positioning the antennas, find the best position for reception while listening to an actual radio program  
(refer to "Listening to Radio Broadcasts" (  
page 19)).  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When radio reception with the supplied FM  
antenna is poor, or when using a communal  
antenna  
Connecting the FM antenna  
Main unit (rear view)  
Main unit (side view)  
FM antenna  
(supplied)  
Main unit  
(rear view)  
Main unit (side view)  
Communal  
antenna terminal  
Antenna cord  
(not supplied)  
Stretch out the FM antenna to the best position for  
radio reception, and then fix it with adhesive tape.  
or  
Outdoor FM antenna  
(not supplied)  
Coaxial cable  
(not supplied)  
When using an antenna other than those  
supplied with this product, refer to the operation  
manuals for the antenna for details of  
connection.  
When positioning the antennas, find the best position for reception while listening to an actual radio program  
(refer to "Listening to Radio Broadcasts" ( page 19)).  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Connections  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
Connecting the Speakers  
After connecting the speakers, gently pull on the  
speaker cords to make sure the cords are firmly  
connected and do not pull out.  
Main unit (rear view)  
Speaker cord  
Speaker cord  
Speaker cord  
Red  
Red  
Black  
Black  
Left speaker (rear view)  
Right speaker (rear view)  
CAUTION  
You can detach the speaker cover.  
• Do not short-circuit the  
and  
speaker termi-  
nals. Doing so may damage the speakers.  
• Do not connect other speakers together with the  
supplied speakers. The change in impedance  
may damage the main unit and the speakers.  
• The speakers of this product are magnetically  
shielded, but color irregularities may occur on the  
TV depending on how the speakers are installed.  
Keep in mind the following.  
Speaker  
cover  
1. Turn off the main power of your TV before  
installing the speakers. Wait for about 30 min-  
utes before turning on the TV again.  
2. If color irregularity occurs in pictures, keep a  
distance of more than 10 cm between the TV  
and the speakers.  
NOTE  
• Improper speaker cord connection spoils the stereo  
effect and sound quality.  
• The impedance of speakers connected to this  
product must be within the range of 4 to 16 .  
• Cooling fan is built into the main unit for emitting  
generated heat. When you turn on the main unit,  
the internal cooling fan automatically starts  
rotating. To ensure sufficient cooling, leave a  
space of more than 1 cm between the main unit  
and the speakers or other objects.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
Connecting Other Equipment  
• For details of signals to be output, refer to page 39.  
• If connecting the main unit to equipment that has  
the function of a Dolby Digital decoder, the set-  
ting in "D. RANGE COMPRESSION" of "AUDIO"  
Read this section when connecting other audio  
equipment to this product.  
(
page 39) will be invalid regarding sound  
from the digital audio output of the main unit.  
Other audio  
equipment  
Connecting with a TV  
TV  
Supplied video cord  
VIDEO IN  
Main unit  
VIDEO  
CAUTION  
• Connect the main unit directly with a TV (or a  
monitor) without routing through a VCR. Otherwise  
it may cause picture distortion while playing back.  
(Such picture distortion is caused by a copy  
protection system, and thus it is not a malfunction.)  
TV  
Audio cord (not supplied)  
Main unit  
VCR  
(or monitor)  
Connecting directly  
CAUTION  
Also, if the main unit is connected to a TV with a  
built-in VCR, there may be picture distortion during  
playback.  
• Before connecting other equipment, turn off both  
the main unit and the equipment.  
NOTE  
Connecting with digital equipment  
• Please check that the setting for VIDEO OUT  
SELECT (PAL/NTSC) on the rear panel of the main  
unit and the color system on your TV set are the  
AV amplifier with a built-in  
decoder (not supplied)  
same. (  
page 6)  
You need to set "MONITOR TYPE" in the  
"PICTURE" menu correctly according to the aspect  
To an optical digital input  
terminal  
ratio of your TV. (  
page 38)  
Optical digital cable  
(not supplied)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Connections  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
When a Clearer Picture Is  
Desired  
Connecting the Power Plug  
Main unit (rear view)  
AC outlet  
You can enjoy pictures of better quality using the  
following cord instead of the supplied video cord.  
Connecting by using the S-video cord  
S-video cord  
TV  
Main unit  
(not supplied)  
• After making all other necessary connections,  
connect in the power plug.  
S-VIDEO  
Connect the ends of S-video cord making  
sure that each end matches its compatible  
terminal.  
NOTE  
• The preset setting such as preset channels and  
sound adjustment may be erased in a few days in  
the following cases:  
- When you disconnect the power plug.  
- When a power failure occurs.  
Connecting by using the component  
video cord  
You can enjoy better quality pictures than when  
using the S-video cord.  
TV  
Demonstration display function  
When you connect the power plug into the AC  
outlet, "DEMO START!" appears in the display  
window and the demonstration display starts.  
When you press  
on the main unit, "DEMO  
OFF" appears in the display window and the  
demonstration display is canceled.  
Turning on the main unit automatically cancels the  
demonstration display.  
Component video cord  
(not supplied)  
Resuming the demonstration display  
With the power turned off, press  
unit.  
on the main  
Hiding the demonstration display  
With the power turned off, hold down  
until "DEMO CLEAR" appears.  
Disconnecting and then reconnecting the  
power plug does not start the demonstration  
display.  
Main unit  
CAUTION  
To activate the demonstration display again,  
• Use one of either the S-video cord or the  
component video cord. If both cords are used,  
pictures may not be played back properly.  
hold down  
appears.  
until "DEMO START!"  
NOTE  
• In order to enjoy pictures with the progressive  
mode (  
page 29), the TV is required to have  
progressive video input.  
• If the component video input jacks of your TV are  
BNC type, use a plug adapter (not supplied) to  
convert the plugs.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation/Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
This manual explains the operations assuming that  
you will use the remote control. Some buttons on  
the main unit are the same as those on the remote  
control. You can use either button in this case.  
2 Set the hour.  
Back  
Next  
• Holding down the button causes the hour to  
increment.  
You can use the number buttons to specify  
the hour.  
Refer to "Using the number buttons" shown  
below.  
Using the number buttons  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Examples: 3:  
13:  
20:  
23:  
3 Press  
.
Number buttons  
To return to step 2, press  
.
4 Set the minute in the same manner  
as steps 2 and 3.  
Adjusting the clock  
Press  
four times to display the clock, and  
then adjust the clock starting from step 2.  
CAUTION  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Displaying the clock while using the  
main unit  
Setting the Clock  
Press  
repeatedly.  
NOTE  
You can set the clock while the main unit is turned  
either on or off.  
Example: To set the clock to 10:10 a.m.  
• The time display on the main unit is a 24-hour  
clock.  
• The clock will gain or lose approximately 1 minute  
per month.  
• Set the clock again after you have disconnected  
the power plug or a power cut has occurred.  
1 Press  
.
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations  
Turning On/Off the Main Unit  
Adjusting the Sound Quality  
Selecting the sound mode  
Press  
(or  
on the main unit).  
• With the power off, pressing either button  
also turns on the main unit. The function  
assigned to the button starts working at the  
same time.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
Remote control:  
Main unit:  
: For emphasizing treble  
and bass sounds.  
: Adequate for songs  
and narrations.  
NOTE  
• Cooling fan is built into the main unit for emitting  
generated heat. When you turn on the main unit,  
the internal cooling fan automatically starts rotating.  
: For emphasizing treble  
sound.  
: For uplifting a feeling  
of being at a live per-  
formance.  
Adjusting the Volume  
: For adjusting treble and  
bass sounds of your  
choice (shown below).  
: Cancels the sound  
mode (initial setting).  
Press  
.
• While the sound mode is set to an item other  
You can also adjust the volume by turning  
the VOLUME control on the main unit.  
than "FLAT",  
is displayed in the  
display window.  
NOTE  
• You can adjust the volume within the range of 0 to  
40.  
NOTE  
• This function does not affect recording sound.  
Temporarily Turning Off the  
Sound (FADE MUTING)  
Adjusting bass/treble sound  
1 Press  
"MANUAL".  
2 For adjusting bass sound;  
Press  
For adjusting treble sound;  
Press  
repeatedly to display  
Press  
.
• "FADE MUTING" appears and the volume  
reduces to "0".  
To return to the previous volume, press  
.
again.  
Emphasizing Heavy Bass  
Sound (AHB PRO)  
.
You can adjust the sound quality within the  
range of -5 to +5.  
• The display returns to the sound source dis-  
play in a few seconds.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, AHB PRO  
NOTE  
function toggles between "ON" and  
"OFF".  
• While AHB PRO function is activated,  
• While the sound mode is set to an item other than  
"MANUAL", "NO OPERATE" is displayed in the dis-  
play window and you cannot adjust bass/treble  
sound.  
is displayed in the display  
window.  
• "AHB PRO" stands for "Active Hyper  
Bass PRO".  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 16.  
Changing the Color Patterns  
3 Press  
to adjust the intensity  
for the Display Window and  
Disc Tray  
of the component color.  
You can also adjust the color intensity by turn-  
ing the VOLUME control on the main unit.  
Press  
(or  
on the main unit).  
You can adjust the color intensity within the  
range of "0" to "3".  
You cannot set all three component colors  
(red, green, and blue) to "0" at the same time.  
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
: For a rainbow-like  
pattern.  
NOTE  
• After you have adjusted each component color, the  
display returns to the sound source display in  
approximately 8 seconds.  
• You cannot set different colors for the display  
window and disc tray.  
: For a flower-image  
pattern.  
• When you operate a button on the main unit or  
remote control, the display window and disc tray  
light in pale blue for approximately 2 seconds.  
• When recording finishes, the color of the display  
window and disc tray switches to the color set in  
"MANUAL" to inform you that recording has  
finished. (With an item other than "MANUAL"  
selected)  
: Gradually changes  
the color pattern in a  
cycle of approximately  
20 seconds.  
: For an ocean-image  
pattern.  
When you operate the main unit after recording  
finishes, the color pattern for the display window  
and disc tray returns to the selected pattern.  
: For a fantasy pattern.  
: For the color of your  
choice. (The setting  
shown on the left is  
initial setting.)  
Changing the brightness of the  
display window and disc tray  
(DIMMER)  
Press  
.
Setting your favorite color for the  
display window and disc tray  
• Each time you press  
as follows.  
, the display toggles  
1 Press  
"MANUAL".  
2 Press  
component color.  
repeatedly to display  
: Color pattern becomes  
dimmer.  
or  
to select a  
: Color pattern  
becomes darker, and  
switches to blue.  
: DIMMER 2 is automat-  
ically selected during  
video playback, and is  
canceled when the  
playback stops.  
: Cancels the brightness  
• Numerical value of the selected component  
color flashes.  
adjustment  
(initial setting).  
NOTE  
• Once you press  
to change the color pattern,  
the brightness returns to the initial setting. (except  
for DIMMER AUTO)  
• When you turn off the main unit, the brightness  
also returns to the initial setting.  
• You cannot turn off the color pattern.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
This product can receive FM and AM radio  
broadcasts.  
Setting the AM Tuner Spacing  
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart,  
and other countries use 10 kHz spacing.  
On the main unit ONLY:  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Number buttons  
When the main unit is turned off  
To select 10 kHz spacing, while holding down  
on the main unit, press  
on the main unit to turn  
on the power. "AM 10 kHz" appears in the display  
window.  
To select 9 kHz spacing, while holding down  
on  
the main unit, press on the main unit to turn on  
the power. "AM 9 kHz" appears in the display  
window.  
NOTE  
• If the spacing is switched, the memory in which the  
radio stations were stored will be erased.  
CAUTION  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting a Radio Station  
Storing Radio Stations  
(Preset)  
1 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"FM" or "AM".  
You can store up to 30 FM radio stations and up to  
15 AM radio stations.  
Example: Display while an FM radio broadcast  
is received  
While the broadcast from the radio station  
you want to preset is being received  
Preset number (  
on the right)  
Stereo indicator  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
Frequency  
2 Press  
.
• The preset number flashes for approxi-  
mately 5 seconds.  
2 Press  
or  
repeatedly to  
select a radio station (frequency).  
You can also select a radio station using the  
automatic tuning.  
3 While the preset number is flash-  
ing, press the number buttons (  
Automatic tuning:  
-
or  
) to select the preset  
Hold down  
or  
until the fre-  
number you want to use.  
quency starts changing, and then release  
the button.  
When the main unit has received a broad-  
cast, the frequency automatically stops  
changing.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
4 While the selected number is  
flashing, press  
To quit the function while searching for a  
.
• "STORED" appears and the selected radio  
station is stored.  
broadcast, press  
or  
.
• When the main unit has received an FM  
stereo broadcast, "STEREO" lights up.  
NOTE  
• When you store a radio station to a preset number  
to which another radio station has previously been  
stored, the newly set radio station replaces the pre-  
viously stored radio station.  
NOTE  
• If an FM stereo broadcast is difficult to hear  
because of noise, you may be able to hear more  
easily by pressing  
to switch the sound to  
monaural reception. In this case, "MONO" lights up.  
To return the sound to stereo reception, press  
Tuning In to a Preset Radio  
Station  
again or select another FM radio station.  
• This product is not compatible with AM stereo  
broadcasts.  
While an FM or AM broadcast is being  
received  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
2 Use the number buttons to select  
the preset number of the radio sta-  
tion to which you want to tune in.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Discs  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
How to read this manual  
Playback  
• Operations are described by mainly using the  
remote control buttons. If there are the same  
marks on the main unit, the buttons on the main  
unit can also be used.  
• The following marks tell you for which type of the  
discs the operation can be made.  
(Refer to page 36 for playing back MP3/WMA and  
JPEG.)  
1 Press  
on the main unit.  
• The disc tray comes out.  
2 Place a disc on the disc tray.  
• The illustrations and TV screens may be different  
between the actual case and the description.  
• "VCD" stands for "Video CD".  
• "SVCD" stands for "Super Video CD".  
Letter-printed surface  
Disc tray  
• When you want to listen to an 8 cm disc,  
place it on the inner hollow of the disc tray.  
Remote control  
mode selector  
3 Press  
.
Display for DVD VIDEO  
Display while a DVD VIDEO is being played  
back:  
DVD indicator  
(The DVD indicator lights up while the DVD VIDEO is  
stopped. The DVD indicator flashes while the DVD  
VIDEO is being played back or paused.)  
Title number  
Chapter number  
Number buttons  
Elapsed playing time  
Display while the DVD VIDEO is stopped:  
Total number of titles  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display for CD  
Display for VCD/SVCD  
Display while a CD is being played back:  
Display while a VCD/SVCD is being played  
back:  
CD indicator  
(The CD indicator lights up while the CD is  
stopped. The CD indicator flashes while the  
CD is being played back or paused.)  
VCD indicator  
(The VCD indicator lights up while the VCD/SVCD  
is stopped. The VCD indicator flashes while the  
VCD/SVCD is being played back or paused.)  
Track number  
Elapsed playing time  
PBC indicator  
Track number  
(
page 23)  
Display while the CD is stopped:  
Total playing time  
Total number of tracks  
Elapsed playing time  
• PBC indicator is displayed while PBC is acti-  
vated.  
Display while the VCD/SVCD is stopped:  
Total number of tracks (*1, *2)  
Display for DVD AUDIO  
Display while a DVD AUDIO is being played  
back:  
DVD indicator  
(The DVD indicator lights up while the DVD AUDIO is  
stopped. The DVD indicator flashes while the DVD  
AUDIO is being played back or paused.)  
Group number  
Total playing time  
*1 "1" will appear after the total number of  
tracks is displayed.  
*2 "PBC" will appear when the disc is PBC-  
compatible.  
Track number  
NOTE  
• The menu may appear in the display window after  
DVD playback starts. In such a case, select the  
desired menu item by using the following buttons  
on the remote control.  
Elapsed playing time  
Display while the DVD AUDIO is stopped:  
Total number of groups  
• Select a menu item with  
,
or  
,
and then press  
.
• Select a menu item with the number buttons.  
• Operation may differ from the explanation given  
here, depending on the disc type.  
• "G1" and "T1" will appear after the total  
number of groups is displayed.  
(Continued on next page)  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Discs  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
Messages displayed on the TV screen  
While a DVD is selected as the sound  
source, the messages shown below are dis-  
played, depending on the status.  
PBC (Playback control)  
• PBC is a signal recorded in a VCD (ver-  
sion 2.0) for controlling VCD playback.  
You can operate software that has inter-  
active or search functions using the menu  
display recorded in a PBC-compatible  
VCD. To play back a VCD without PBC,  
follow the operation below.  
NOW READING  
The main unit is reading the disc. Wait for a  
while.  
• Select the desired track number with the  
number buttons while playback is  
stopped.  
REGION CODE ERROR!  
The disc cannot be played back because its  
region code is not compatible. (  
page 4)  
• While playback is stopped, press  
NO DISC  
or  
to select the desired track num-  
No disc is loaded.  
OPEN  
The disc tray is opening.  
ber, and then press  
• While a VCD or SVCD is being played  
.
CLOSE  
The disc tray is closing.  
back, press  
menu group.  
to return to the higher  
CANNOT PLAY  
You are trying to play back an unplayable  
disc.  
Playing Back from a Position  
10 Seconds Before  
(One Touch Replay)  
Guide icons temporarily displayed on  
the TV screen (on-screen guide)  
While a disc is being played back  
: Play  
(
Press  
.
page 21)  
: Pause  
NOTE  
(
page 24)  
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
• You cannot return to the previous title.  
: Fast reverse/Fast forward search  
(
page 24)  
:
Slow motion playback (reverse/  
forward directions)( page 25)  
: Containing multi-angle views  
page 27)  
(
: Containing multi-audio  
page 26)  
(
: Containing multi-subtitle  
page 27)  
(
: The disc cannot accept the operation  
you have attempted.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 21.  
Stopping Playback  
Pausing Playback  
While a disc is being played back  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
Press  
.
Resuming Playback (RESUME)  
To resume normal playback, press  
.
• Playback cannot be paused by pressing  
on the main unit during JPEG disc slide-show.  
When playback is stopped in the middle, playback  
can be started from the stopped scene.  
Advancing Picture Frame by  
Frame  
How to suspend playback  
While a disc is being played back  
Perform any of the following operations during  
playback.  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is paused  
Press  
Press  
once.*  
Press  
.
to turn off the power.  
• Each time you press  
, picture will be  
advanced frame by frame.  
Change the source to FM/AM or AUX.*  
You cannot operate this function with  
the main unit.  
on  
* Even if the power is turned off by pressing  
after this, the position where playback has  
been stopped will be stored.  
Fast Reverse/Fast Forward  
Search  
How to start playback from the stored  
position  
There are two methods.  
Press  
.
While a disc is being played back  
NOTE  
Press  
or  
.
• This function does not work in program playback or  
random playback.  
• The position where playback starts again may be  
a little different from the stopped position.  
• When a disc menu is displayed, the resume func-  
tion may not work.  
• The audio, the subtitle and the angle at that time  
are stored as well as the stopped position.  
• The stored position will be cleared if the disc tray  
• Each time you press  
increases as shown below.  
or  
, the speed  
×2 ×5 ×10  
×20  
×60  
To restore the normal speed, press  
.
Hold down  
or  
.
is opened. Further, if  
is pressed during  
is  
• Fast reverse/fast forward search can be car-  
ried out only while the button is pressed.  
playback, "RESUME" appears. If  
pressed at this time, "RESUME" will disappear  
and the stored information will be cleared.  
• Resume function is set to on as the initial  
preset. You can set the function to off  
NOTE  
• For a DVD VIDEO, SVCD or VCD, no sound comes  
out during fast reverse/fast forward search.  
• For a CD or DVD AUDIO, sound is intermittent  
during fast reverse/fast forward search.  
(
page 39).  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 21.  
2 Press the number buttons (  
-
Slow Motion Playback  
or  
) to select the track/chapter  
you want to listen to.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is paused  
NOTE  
• You can operate a VCD or SVCD while the disc is  
stopped or played back with PBC off.  
• You can operate a DVD AUDIO, CD, MP3, WMA,  
or JPEG while the disc is either played back or  
stopped.  
Press  
or  
.
• Each time you press  
increases as shown below.  
, the speed  
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
/
16  
8
32  
4
2
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
• Press  
to pause playback, and press  
to resume normal playback.  
Selecting a Track from the  
Menu Screen  
NOTE  
• No sound will be produced.  
• The picture motion in the reverse direction may  
not be smooth.  
• For a VCD or SVCD, slow motion playback can  
be carried out in the forward direction only.  
While a disc is stopped or being played  
back*  
Skipping to the Beginning of a  
Track  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
While a disc is being played back*  
2 Press  
or  
.
Press  
or  
.
• A menu screen of the disc appears.  
• Each time you press  
chapter/track/file skips to the beginning of the  
previous chapter/track/file.  
, the current  
• Only  
can be used for DVD AUDIOs.  
3 Press  
(only for a  
• Each time you press  
, the current chapter/  
track/file skips to the beginning of the next  
chapter/track/file.  
DVD VIDEO or a DVD AUDIO) or  
the number buttons to select a  
track you want to listen to.  
• Press  
group.  
or  
to select a title or  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
NOTE  
• If there are two or more pages of menu  
* For a VCD or SVCD, this operation can be carried  
out only during playback without the PBC function.  
• Except for a DVD VIDEO, this operation can also  
be carried out while the disc is stopped.  
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
screen, press or to change the  
pages (only for a VCD or SVCD).  
4 Press  
.
NOTE  
* You can operate a VCD or SVCD while PBC is set  
to off.  
• You cannot perform this function with discs to  
which a menu screen is not recorded.  
• Some disc may start playback even if you do not  
Skipping to the Beginning of a  
Track with the Number Buttons  
press  
.
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Discs  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Selecting the Audio  
While a disc containing two or more audio  
is being played back  
AUDIO  
Remote control  
mode selector  
1 Press  
.
Example: TV screen  
Selected audio/Total  
number of audio  
Selected audio  
• Each time you press AUDIO , the audio will  
be changed. The audio can also be  
changed by pressing  
.
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
Number buttons  
NOTE  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
menu bar (  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to "Lan-  
guage Codes" ( page 41).  
page 34).  
• When 2 channel sounds are recorded in 1/2 and  
multi channel sounds with down-mix prohibited  
are recorded in 2/2 in a DVD AUDIO, you can  
select 1/2 only.  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Selecting the Subtitle  
Selecting a View Angle  
(only for moving image)  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc containing two or more subti-  
tles is being played back  
While a disc containing two or more view  
angles is being played back  
1 Press  
Example: TV screen  
.
1 Press  
Example: TV screen  
.
Selected view angle/  
Total number of view  
angles  
Selected subtitle/Total  
number of subtitles  
(When no subtitle is  
set in the disc, "--"  
appears.)  
Selected  
view angle  
Selected subtitle  
(When no  
subtitle is set in  
the disc, "OFF"  
appears.)  
• Each time you press  
be changed. The angle can also be  
changed by pressing  
, the angle will  
.
2 Press  
subtitle.  
to select a  
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
3 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
NOTE  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
NOTE  
menu bar (  
page 34).  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
menu bar (  
page 34).  
Magnifying the Picture (ZOOM)  
• For an SVCD, each time you press  
in step  
1, the subtitle type and ON/OFF will be changed.  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to "Lan-  
guage Codes" (  
• The manner of displaying subtitles may be differ-  
ent depending on the disc.  
page 41).  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is played back or paused  
1 Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, the picture  
Canceling the subtitle  
magnification will be changed (OFF,  
ZOOM1 - 6).  
Press  
to select "OFF".  
• When a JPEG disc is used, the picture  
magnification changes through "ZOOM  
1", "ZOOM 2" to "OFF". You cannot  
change the picture magnification during  
slide-show playback.  
2 Select the portion you want to see  
by pressing  
.
CAUTION  
• When you magnify a picture, image quality may be  
deteriorated or image may be distorted.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Example:  
Adjusting the Picture Quality  
(VFP)  
5 Press  
value.  
to change the  
While a disc is played back or paused  
6 Press  
.
1 Press  
.
To adjust other items, go back to step 3.  
Example: TV screen  
7 Press  
.
Current VFP mode  
USER1  
NOTE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
• If no operation is made for several seconds during  
the procedure, the settings made so far will be  
automatically stored.  
• "VFP" stands for "video fine processor".  
Creating Realistic Sound  
(3D PHONIC)  
Setting items  
GAMMA  
: Controls the brightness of neutral  
tints while maintaining the  
brightness of dark and light  
portions.  
The two speakers produce an effect resembling  
surround-sound.  
(Setting range: –3 - +3)  
BRIGHTNESS: Controls the brightness of the  
display.  
(Setting range: –8 - +8)  
CONTRAST : Controls the contrast of the  
display.  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
Example: TV screen  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
SATURATION : Controls the saturation of the  
display.  
3D PHONIC  
ACTION  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
: Controls the tint of the display.  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
SHARPNESS : Controls the sharpness of the  
display.  
• Each time you press  
as follows.  
, the display toggles  
TINT  
: Suitable for action movies,  
sport programs or other  
lively programs.  
ACTION  
(Setting range: –8 - +8)  
: You can relax with a natural  
atmosphere.  
DRAMA  
2 Press  
to select VFP mode.  
NORMAL  
: For normal playback.  
: You can enjoy the sound  
effect as if you were  
watching the movie in a  
theater.  
THEATER  
OFF  
(You cannot adjust the image  
quality.) Go to step 7.  
: Suitable when viewing a movie in  
a dim room.  
(You cannot adjust the image  
quality.) Go to step 7.  
CINEMA  
: Cancels 3D phonic (initial  
setting).  
• While 3D phonic is activated,  
displayed in the display window.  
is  
USER1/USER2: You can adjust the image quality.  
Go to step 3.  
NOTE  
3 Press  
to select an item  
you want to adjust.  
• 3D phonic is effective for both the speakers and  
headphones.  
• When noise is produced or sound is distorted,  
4 Press  
.
set  
"
3D PHONIC  
"
to "OFF".  
• You cannot operate some types of DVD AUDIO  
discs.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Adjusting Playback Level  
(DVD LEVEL)  
Enjoying Better Pictures  
(PROGRESSIVE)  
In the progressive mode, you can enjoy better  
pictures.  
The audio of a DVD VIDEO and DVD AUDIO may  
be recorded at a lower level (volume) than for  
other types of disc. You can adjust the DVD level.  
CAUTION  
• In order to enjoy pictures in the progressive mode,  
the following requirements should be met.  
• There must be component video input termi-  
nals on the TV set connected to the main unit.  
• The main unit and the TV set must be con-  
nected using a component video cord  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, the display  
(
page 15).  
toggles as follows in the display window.  
When the above requirements are not satisfied,  
leave the main unit in the Interlace mode. If the  
progressive mode is set, pictures may be dis-  
torted.  
: Sound level recorded in the  
DVD.  
: Enhances the sound level  
(initial setting).  
While the disc is played back or paused  
: Enhances the sound level to the  
highest level.  
Hold down  
.
• Each time you press  
toggles as follows.  
, the display  
• Select the level while listening to the  
sound played back.  
Interlace mode (initial setting)  
NOTE  
• DVD level is effective only for playback of a DVD.  
• Even if the DVD level is changed, the output  
level from the digital audio output terminal will not  
be changed.  
• This function does not affect recording sound.  
Progressive mode  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Playing Back the Bonus  
Group  
Browsable Still Pictures  
(B.S.P.)  
There are some DVD AUDIO discs with a special  
group, called "bonus group", recorded.  
There are some DVD AUDIO discs with still pic-  
tures recorded. Among the still pictures, there are  
pictures called B.S.P. (browsable still pictures).  
You can change these pictures as if turning over  
pages.  
Bonus indicator  
• This operation can be carried out when  
"BONUS" is lit in the display window on  
the main unit.  
B.S.P. indicator  
• This operation can be carried out when  
"B.S.P." is lit in the display window on the  
main unit.  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Press  
.
• Each time you press  
will be switched over.  
, the still picture  
2 Press  
repeatedly during  
playback to select a bonus group.  
You can also change the pictures by  
pressing  
.
• "KEY_ _ _ _" appears on the TV screen  
and in the display window on the main  
unit.  
Example: TV screen  
Selected page/  
Total number of  
pages  
3 Press the number buttons to enter  
a pin code (4 digits).  
• The method of getting a pin code is  
different depending on the disc.  
Selected page  
(still picture)  
4 Press  
.
• When a correct pin code is entered,  
"BONUS" disappears and the playback  
of the bonus group starts.  
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
• If an incorrect pin code is entered, try  
entering a correct pin code again.  
NOTE  
• You can operate this function on the menu bar  
(
page 34).  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Example: For DVD VIDEO  
Playing Back the Disc in the  
Desired Order (Program  
Playback)  
TV screen  
Program  
screen  
You can program a maximum of 99 chapters or  
tracks. You can program the same chapter or track  
more than once.  
While a disc is stopped  
3 Press the number buttons (  
-
or  
) to program chapters/  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
tracks.  
Display for DVD VIDEO  
• Select a title number, and then select a  
chapter number.  
Title number Chapter number  
2 Press  
to select "PROGRAM".  
Display for DVD VIDEO  
Program number  
Program indicator  
Display for DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
• Select a group number, and then select a  
track number.  
Display for DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
DVD, MP3 or WMA  
DVD, MP3 or WMA  
Track number  
Group number  
Program indicator  
Program number  
Display for CD/VCD/SVCD  
Display for CD/VCD/SVCD  
• Select a track number.  
Track number  
CD or VCD  
"VCD" is displayed while  
VCD/SVCD is selected.  
Program indicator  
Program number  
Total time for  
program playback  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Example: For DVD VIDEO  
Random Playback  
TV screen  
1
5
You can listen to tracks or chapters in random  
order.  
While playback is stopped  
1 Press  
"RANDOM".  
repeatedly to select  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
page 16).  
(
Example: For CD  
• Before selecting a bonus group of a DVD  
AUDIO, cancel the "BONUS" display as  
explained in "Playing back the Bonus  
Group" on page 30.  
• When you try to enter more than 99 chap-  
ters or tracks, "MEMORY FULL" appears.  
Random indicator  
• "RANDOM" appears in the TV screen.  
4 Press  
.
2 Press  
.
Confirming programmed content  
NOTE  
While playback is stopped, press  
• Pressing  
back to the previous track.  
repeatedly does not return play-  
or  
repeatedly.  
• During this operation, you can add a  
track as the last in the program, or erase  
• Each track is played back once.  
the last track. (  
step 3)  
Canceling random playback  
Canceling program playback  
While playback is stopped, press  
While playback is stopped, press  
repeatedly to display an item  
repeatedly to display an item  
other than "RANDOM".  
other than "PROGRAM".  
• This operation does not erase the pro-  
grammed content.  
NOTE  
• Ejecting the disc or turning off the main unit also  
cancels random playback.  
Erasing the whole program  
While playback is stopped, hold down  
.
NOTE  
• Ejecting the disc or turning off the main unit also  
erases the programmed content. This operation  
also cancels program playback.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Repeat Playback  
Refer to page 37 for repeat playback of MP3/WMA  
and JPEG files.  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
will be changed.  
, the repeat type  
For DVD VIDEO  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
Repeat types  
TV screen  
CHAP*  
TITLE  
Repeats the  
current chapter  
REPEAT  
CHAPTER*  
Repeats the  
current title  
REPEAT  
TITLE  
ALL  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
OFF  
For DVD AUDIO  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Repeats the  
current track  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
TRACK*  
GROUP  
OFF  
Repeats the  
current group  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
GROUP  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
For CD/VCD/SVCD  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Repeats the  
current track  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
TRACK*  
ALL  
Repeats all  
tracks  
REPEAT  
ALL  
ALL  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
OFF  
* "STEP" is displayed during program playback or  
random playback.  
NOTE  
• For a VCD and SVCD, the operation can be carried  
out during playback without the PBC function  
(
page 23).  
• You can also operate this function on the menu  
bar ( page 34).  
• For details on A-B repeat (repeat playback of a  
designated part), refer to page 35.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Bar and Menu Bar  
Changes time information displayed in  
the display window on the main unit and  
the status bar. Each time  
is  
Time display  
selection  
pressed, the display will be changed.  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
TOTAL : Elapsed playing time of current title/  
group  
Remote control  
mode selector  
T.REM : Remaining time of current title/group  
TIME : Elapsed playing time of current  
chapter/track  
REM  
:
Remaining time of current chapter/track  
CD/VCD/SVCD  
TIME : Elapsed playing time of current track  
REM : Remaining time of current track  
TOTAL : Elapsed playing time of disc  
T.REM : Remaining time of disc  
page 33  
Number buttons  
Repeat mode  
Time search  
page 35  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
Selects a chapter/track. Press the  
number buttons to enter the chapter/  
track number and press  
Examples:  
.
Chapter search/  
Track search  
You can display the status bar and menu bar on  
the TV screen, and can control discs with the bars.  
5:  
24:  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/VCD/SVCD  
CAUTION  
page 26  
Audio  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/SVCD  
page 27  
Subtitle  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
Using the Status Bar and  
Menu Bar  
page 27  
View angle  
Page switch  
DVD AUDIO  
Switches the still pictures (B.S.P.)  
recorded on a DVD AUDIO disc.  
While a disc is being played back  
page 30  
1 Press  
twice.  
Information displayed on the status bar  
Status bar  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO (the example below is  
for a DVD VIDEO)  
Menu bar  
• The above is an example for a DVD VIDEO.  
Time Playback status  
Transfer rate  
(only for DVD VIDEO)  
(DVD VIDEO)  
Current chapter number  
(DVD AUDIO)  
(DVD VIDEO)  
2 Press  
to select an item you  
Current title number  
(DVD AUDIO)  
Current track number  
want to operate.  
Current group number  
3 Press  
.
VCD/SVCD/CD (the example below is for a CD)  
You can set the selected function. For the  
setting items, refer to the following "Function  
list".  
Time Playback status  
Playback mode  
• The currently active function shows blue.  
Current track number  
NOTE  
To cancel the menu bar, press  
.
• The playback status mark has the same meaning of  
Function list  
the mark on the on-screen guide (  
page 23).  
Press  
to select, and press  
to  
determine unless otherwise noted.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Status Bar and Menu Bar  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 34.  
Playing Back the Designated  
Part Repeatedly  
(A-B Repeat Playback)  
Designate the Time  
(Time Search)  
While a disc is being played back  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
1 Press  
twice.  
• The menu bar (  
page 34) appears.  
2 Press  
3 Press  
to select  
.
2 Press  
twice.  
• The menu bar appears (  
page 34).  
.
4 Press  
to select  
3 Press  
4 Press  
5 Enter the time using the number  
to select  
.
.
A
B
.
5 Press  
at the starting point of  
the part to be repeated (designat-  
ing A point).  
buttons ( ).  
-
,
Example: When you want to play back a  
disc from the position of (0 hour)  
23 minutes 45 seconds, press  
the buttons in the order:  
• The icon on the menu bar will be  
.
6 Press  
at the end of the part to  
be repeated (designating B point).  
• The icon on the menu bar will be  
.
"
A-B" appears in the display window on  
You can skip entering "minutes" and  
"seconds".  
the main unit and the part between A and B  
points is played back repeatedly.  
• If you enter wrong numbers, press  
to  
Canceling A-B repeat playback  
delete the numbers, and then enter the  
numbers again.  
To cancel A-B repeat playback:  
• Press  
.
6 Press  
.
• Select  
(Select  
and press  
.)  
twice.  
To delete the menu bar, press  
.
NOTE  
NOTE  
• You may not be able to operate this function  
depending on the disc.  
• You can operate a VCD and SVCD while the disc is  
played back with PBC off.  
• This function does not work during program play-  
back or random playback.  
• For a CD, this operation can always be carried  
out. For a VCD or SVCD, the operation can be  
carried out when the disc is stopped or during  
playback without the PBC function.  
• A-B repeat playback is possible only within the  
same title or track. A-B repeat playback cannot  
be carried out during PBC playback, program  
playback, random playback and repeat playback.  
• Time search for a DVD VIDEO is from the  
beginning of the title, for a DVD AUDIO is from  
the beginning of the track being played back.  
Time search for a VCD, SVCD and a CD is as  
follows:  
• When the disc is stopped, time search is from  
the beginning of the disc.  
• When the disc is being played back, time search  
is within the track currently being played back.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG Discs  
Playback  
Display of an MP3/WMA disc is described here as  
an example.  
For a JPEG disc, read "track" as "file".  
Remote control  
mode selector  
NOTE  
• When playing back a disc containing both MP3/  
WMA and JPEG files, set one of them to be played  
(
page 38).  
1 Insert a disc.  
Example: TV screen  
This indicator lights up  
during repeat playback  
This indicator lights up  
during program playback  
(
page 37).  
Elapsed playing time of  
the selected track  
(only for MP3/WMA).  
(
page 31).  
Group list  
Number buttons  
Tag information of the  
selected track  
(only for MP3s/WMAs)  
Track list (Tracks con-  
tained in the selected  
group)  
Example: Display window  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Group number  
Track number  
"WMA" is displayed when a WMA disc  
is loaded, and "JPG" is displayed when  
a JPEG disc is loaded.  
2 Press  
3 Press  
to select a group.  
to move to the track list.  
• Pressing  
returns to the group list.  
(Continued on next page)  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG Discs  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 36.  
4 Press  
5 Press  
to select a track.  
.
Repeat Playback  
or  
Example: Display during playback  
While a disc is being played back  
Group number  
Track number  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
changed.  
, the repeat type is  
Display in the  
display window on  
the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Elapsed playing time  
(This indicator is not displayed  
while a JPEG is loaded.)  
• At first, a track title (file name) is scrolled.  
Repeats the  
current track  
(only for MP3/  
WMA)  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
REPEAT*  
TRACK  
• When an MP3 or WMA is loaded, tag information  
(title/artist/album) is scrolled followed by a track  
title.  
• Only alphanumerical one-byte characters are  
displayed properly as a track title or tag informa-  
tion.  
Repeats the  
current group  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
GROUP  
ALL  
Repeats the  
entire disc  
REPEAT  
ALL  
REPEAT ALL  
No display  
Cancels repeat  
playback  
REPEAT  
OFF  
NOTE  
* "STEP" is displayed during program playback and  
random playback.  
• You can also use  
You can also use the number buttons in step 4. In  
this case, steps 3 and 5 are not needed. Refer to  
and  
in step 2.  
NOTE  
“Using the number buttons” (  
page 16).  
• The repeat types can also be changed while the  
disc is stopped.  
• The repeat playback is automatically canceled if  
there is a file that cannot be played back  
• You can also use or  
in step 4. In this  
case, step 3 is not needed.  
(
page 4).  
Slide-show playback  
• For a JPEG disc, when you press  
in step  
5, files are continuously played back from the  
selected file (slide-show playback). When you  
press  
, only a selected file is played back.  
• A file is displayed for approximately 3 seconds  
in a slide-show playback.  
• After all files are played back, the playback is  
automatically stopped.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preferences  
LANGUAGE  
NOTE  
• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc,  
the optimum language set for the disc appears.  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to the  
"Language Codes" (  
page 41).  
Number buttons  
Items  
Contents  
MENU LANGUAGE Select the language for the DVD VIDEO menu.  
AUDIO LANGUAGE Select the audio language for the DVD VIDEO.  
Select the subtitle language for the DVD  
VIDEO.  
SUBTITLE  
ON SCREEN  
LANGUAGE  
Select the language displayed on the preference  
screens.  
You can change the initial settings of this product  
according to the environment the product is used  
in.  
PICTURE  
Items  
Contents (  
: initial setting)  
CAUTION  
MONITOR Select a display method suitable for your TV.  
TYPE  
16 : 9 /16 : 9 MULTI (wide TV):  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your wide  
TV is fixed to 16:9 (when playing back a DVD  
VIDEO recorded at 4:3, this product automatically  
adjusts the screen width of the output signal).  
NOTE  
• The top and bottom of the preference screen may  
not be displayed on a wide TV. Adjust the picture  
size on the TV.  
4 : 3 LB/4 : 3 MULTI LB (letter box):  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your TV is  
conventional 4:3. While viewing a wide screen  
picture, the black bars appear on the top and  
bottom of the screen.  
Basic Operations  
This section explains basic operation for changing  
various settings.  
While a disc is stopped or no disc is loaded  
(while "NO DISC" is displayed)  
4 : 3 PS/4 : 3 MULTI PS (pan scan):  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your TV is  
conventional 4:3. While viewing a wide screen  
picture, the left and right edges of the picture will not  
be shown on the screen. (If the disc is not  
compatible with the pan scan, the picture will be  
displayed at the letter box ratio.)  
1 Press  
.
• "SETTING" appears in the display window  
on the main unit and the following screen  
appears on the TV.  
PICTURE Select an item suitable to the video source.  
SOURCE VIDEO:  
Select this item when you want to view a normal  
video.  
FILM:  
Select this item when you want to view a film or  
video recorded with the progressive scan method.  
AUTO:  
The video source type (a video or film) is  
automatically selected.  
• Proceed with operations by following the  
description on the TV screen.  
SCREEN Select the screen saver mode between  
/OFF  
ON  
SAVER  
(screen saver activates when there is no operation  
made for about 5 minutes since a still picture was  
last displayed).  
FILE  
TYPE  
If a disc includes an AUDIO file (MP3/WMA) and a  
still picture file (JPEG), select which file is played  
back. If you change this setting, open and close the  
disc tray, or momentarily turn off the main unit. (A  
disc either with audio files or still picture files can be  
played back regardless of this setting.)  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Preferences  
AUDIO  
OTHERS  
Items  
RESUME  
Contents (  
page 24)  
: initial setting)  
Items  
Contents (  
: initial setting)  
(
DIGITAL  
Select an output signal type from the  
following in accordance with the  
equipment connected to the digital audio  
output terminal (AV amplifier, etc.). (See the  
list below for the preference items and  
output signal.)  
AUDIO  
ON SCREEN Select whether you display guide icons on  
GUIDE  
OUTPUT  
the on-screen guide indicating status of a  
disc/main unit (For details on the guide  
icons, refer to page 23)  
AV COMPU  
LINK MODE  
When you want to control JVC TV by using  
this product, select a mode that matches  
the terminal from the following. (For more  
details, refer to "Using AV COMPU LINK"  
on page 51.)  
PCM ONLY:  
Equipment corresponding only to linear PCM.  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM:  
Dolby digital decoder or equipment having the  
same function.  
DVD1 :  
Connect to the video-3 input on the TV set.  
STREAM/PCM :  
DTS/Dolby digital decoder or equipment  
having the same function.  
DVD2:  
Connect to the video-1 input of the TV set.  
DOWN MIX  
Switch signal from the digital output  
DVD3:  
terminal of the DVD VIDEO according to  
the connected equipment. Select this when  
Digital Audio Output is set to "PCM ONLY".  
Connect to the video-2 input of the TV set.  
PARENTAL  
LOCK  
Set the parental lock function to cut off  
violent scenes or replace the scenes with  
others. (This is effective only for discs  
equipped with the parental lock function.)  
DOLBY SURROUND :  
A dolby pro logic decoder-built-in equipment.  
STEREO:  
An ordinary equipment.  
COUNTRY CODE (  
page 40)  
Select your country or area.  
SET LEVEL:  
The restriction is stricter as the number  
becomes smaller. "NONE" is no restriction.  
• When 3D phonic is activated, Down Mix  
does not work.  
D (Dynamic).  
RANGE  
To make adjustments for the difference  
between a high volume and a low volume  
PASSWORD (essential):  
Enter four-digit number as your password  
using the number buttons (1-9, 0) every time.  
(Enter "8888" if you forget your password.)  
The password is required at the time of  
playback.  
COMPRESSION when playing back with low volume (only  
for a DVD recorded with Dolby digital).  
:
AUTO  
D. range compression automatically works.  
ON:  
• If you enter a wrong password three times,  
"EXIT" will be automatically selected.  
D. range compression always works.  
List of relationships of DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT preference items and output  
signal  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT preference  
Playback disc  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM  
PCM ONLY  
48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits  
Linear PCM DVD VIDEO  
96 kHz linear PCM DVD VIDEO  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
48/96/192 kHz,  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
16/20/24 bits linear PCM DVD AUDIO  
44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,  
16/20/24 bits linear PCM DVD AUDIO  
DTS DVD VIDEO  
DTS bit stream  
DOLBY DIGITAL bit stream  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL DVD VIDEO/  
DVD AUDIO  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear  
PCM  
CD/VCD/SVCD  
DTS CD  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
DTS bit stream 44.1 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
MP3/WMA disc  
NOTE  
• For a DVD VIDEO without content protection set, there is a 20 bit or 24 bit output at the digital audio output terminal.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Country/Area Codes  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Language Codes  
Code Language  
Code Language  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DA  
DZ  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FI  
Afar  
MK  
ML  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NL  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Dutch  
NO  
OC  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
OM (Afan) Oromo  
OR  
PA  
PL  
PS  
PT  
QU  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Polish  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Corsican  
Czech  
Welsh  
Danish  
Bhutani  
RM Rhaeto-Romance  
RN  
RO  
RU  
Kirundi  
Rumanian  
Russian  
Greek  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Faroese  
Frisian  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
FJ  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
IE  
IK  
IN  
IS  
IW  
JI  
JW  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
SK  
SL  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SV  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Hindi  
Siswati  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swedish  
SW Swahili  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
TK  
TL  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
Tamil  
Telugu  
Tajik  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
Yiddish  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
Kirghiz  
Latin  
Lingala  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
TW Twi  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
VO  
WO Wolof  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
LV  
MG Malagasy  
MI  
Maori  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Discs/Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Cassette tape indicator  
(The cassette tape indicator lights up while the cas-  
sette tape is stopped. The cassette tape indicator  
flashes while the cassette tape is being played back.)  
Reverse mode  
Cassette tape playback  
direction ( : normal direc-  
tion/ : opposite direction)  
CAUTION  
• Before using a cassette tape, wind up any slack in  
the cassette tape. (  
page 52)  
• Do not use long cassette tapes such as C-120 or  
C-150. Long cassette tapes are thin and stretch  
easily, and may become tangled in the inner part  
of the main unit.  
• This product is compatible with playback of  
TYPE I cassette tapes. Playback of TYPE II or  
TYPE IV cassette tapes is not recommended,  
because this product does not meet the specifi-  
cations for these tapes. The main unit does not  
produce the proper sound from these cassette  
tape types.  
Operation  
2 Press  
repeatedly to select  
the reverse mode.  
Stop  
Press  
.
: For one return playback of both  
sides.  
Press  
• When a cassette tape is played back  
in the normal direction ( ), is  
or  
.
: For repeated playback of both sides  
(Playback continues until playback is  
stopped.)  
fast forward and is rewind.  
Fast forward/  
Rewind  
• When the cassette tape is played  
back in the opposite direction ( ),  
: For one-way playback of either side.  
is fast forward and  
rewind.  
• You can perform the same operation  
is  
3 Press  
.
• Playback starts.  
by pressing or  
.
• When the main unit is turned off, pressing  
automatically turns on the main unit.  
1 Insert a cassette tape.  
• Each time you press  
, the cassette tape  
playback direction changes. The initial play-  
back direction after you have inserted a cas-  
sette tape is always the normal direction.  
• The cassette tape playback direction indica-  
tor facing right is displayed during normal  
playback. The indicator facing left is dis-  
played during reverse playback.  
Insert a cassette tape  
with the side you want to  
listen to facing up.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Other Equipment/Recording Sound  
Listening to Other Equipment  
Adjusting the Sound Input  
Level from Other Equipment  
Adjusting the sound input level of the  
AUX  
1 Press  
.
2 Hold down  
until the input level  
appears.  
• Each time you hold down  
toggles as follows.  
, the display  
For ordinary use.  
(initial setting)  
For increasing the level.  
1 Press  
.
2 Start other equipment playback.  
• Refer to the operation manual for the con-  
nected equipment.  
3 Adjust the volume and make other  
necessary settings.  
• For adjusting the volume and making other  
necessary settings, refer to "Basic Opera-  
tions" (  
page 17).  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
Main unit  
Preventing recorded sound from  
being erased  
• Write protect tags are attached to a cassette  
tape for preventing the erasing of recorded  
sound. They enable you to avoid losing impor-  
tant recordings because once you snap off the  
write protect tags, you cannot record to the cas-  
sette tape or erase recorded material.  
• When you want to use the cassette tape for  
recording again, cover the tag holes with adhe-  
sive tape.  
Remote control  
Write protect  
tag for side A  
Write protect  
tag for side B  
1 Insert a cassette tape for record-  
ing.  
• Before inserting the cassette tape, wind the  
tape past the leader part of the cassette  
tape.  
Magnetic tape  
(recordable part)  
Leader tape (unrecordable part)  
2 Press  
mode.  
to select the reverse  
NOTE  
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
• The sound input level during recording is automati-  
cally adjusted.  
• When you record tracks from a disc, a 4-second  
blank is inserted between tracks in the recording.  
You can record tracks with no blank time.  
: For one-way recording on either  
side.  
: For one return recording on both  
sides.  
(
page 45)  
: Pressing  
automatically  
CAUTION  
starts one return recording on  
both sides.  
You can change the reverse mode during  
• It may be unlawful to record or playback  
copyright material without the consent of the  
copyright owner.  
recording.  
• Do not use long cassette tapes such as C-120 or  
C-150. Long cassette tapes are thin and stretch  
easily, and may become tangled in the inner part  
of the main unit.  
• Since this product is not compatible with TYPE II  
and TYPE IV cassette tapes, do not use these  
types of cassette tapes. This product does not  
meet the specifications for these tapes, so sound  
is not properly recorded to these types of cas-  
sette tapes. You cannot obtain proper playback  
sound.  
(Continued on next page)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 44.  
3
Select a sound source for recording.  
Recording the Second or  
Subsequent Track to the Last  
Track from a Disc  
Sound source  
Operation  
Press  
, and then press  
.
Disc  
(The disc is stopped.)  
(For a DVD VIDEO: while the disc is paused)  
Select the radio station whose broad-  
Radio  
For a CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD VIDEO  
Before proceeding to step 4, select the  
starting track/chapter number by  
broadcast  
cast you want to record (  
page 19).  
Sound from  
other  
equipment  
(AUX)  
Press  
and prepare playback on  
the other equipment (  
page 43).  
pressing  
or  
.
For a DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
Before proceeding to step 4, select the  
4 Press  
on the main unit.  
Example: Display while CD sound is recorded  
group number by pressing  
, and then select the track num-  
ber by pressing or  
or  
.
Program Recording from a  
Disc  
• When you record from a disc, all tracks are  
recorded to the cassette tape.  
• When you want to record sound from other  
equipment, start playback on the connected  
equipment.  
• When recording finishes, the color pattern of  
the display window and disc tray switches to  
the color pattern set in "MANUAL" to inform  
Before proceeding to step 4, program  
the tracks you want to record  
(
page 31).  
you that recording has finished (  
18).  
page  
Recording with No Blank Time  
between Tracks  
Quitting Recording  
Before proceeding to step 4, play back  
a disc, pause the playback, and then  
Press  
.
press  
of the first track.  
to return to the beginning  
Recording Only One Track  
from a Disc  
Erasing Recorded Sound  
from a Cassette Tape  
(Excluding DVD VIDEOs)  
Before proceeding to step 4, play back  
the track you want to record.  
Select the sound from other equip-  
ment (AUX) in step 3, and then press  
• Pressing  
in step 4 returns playback to  
.
the beginning of the track and only that track  
is recorded.  
• Do not play back any tracks on the  
connected equipment.  
NOTE  
• If the cassette tape reverses direction while a track  
is being recorded from a disc, this product starts  
recording that track again from the beginning onto  
the reverse side of the cassette tape. However, if  
12 or less seconds of that track were recorded onto  
the first side of the cassette tape, recording to the  
reverse side of the cassette tape starts from the  
beginning of the previous track.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Sound/Convenient Functions  
Set the clock beforehand (  
page 16).  
Using the Timers  
Sleep Timer  
When the specified time passes, the main unit  
automatically turns off.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
(in minutes) toggles as follows.  
, the time display  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Cancel (Sleep  
indicator disappears.)  
Example: Display while the sleep timer is set to  
60 minutes  
Sleep indicator  
Number buttons  
NOTE  
• When you set the sleep timer, the display window  
automatically dims.  
• Before the clock has been set (While "0:00" is  
flashing), when you press  
ADJUST!" appears.  
, "CLOCK  
Changing the sleep timer setting  
• Press  
repeatedly to select the time again.  
Confirming the sleep timer setting  
(remaining time)  
• With the sleep timer activated, press  
once.  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Using the Timers  
ONCE  
: The recording timer works  
once.  
Recording Timer  
EVERYDAY : The recording timer works  
every day.  
You can use the recording timer function to record  
FM/AM broadcasts or sound from other equipment  
to cassette tape.  
You can enter up to three timer settings in total for  
the recording timer and the playback timer  
7 Press  
8 Press  
.
or  
to select "REC  
(
page 48).  
TIMER".  
• "REC" stands for "Recording".  
NOTE  
• Timer settings remain unchanged until the timer is  
replaced by new setting.  
9 Press  
10 Press  
.
or  
sound source.  
to select a  
1 Prepare the sound source.  
Radio  
Preset the radio station whose  
broadcast you want to record.  
Example: To record an FM broadcast to a  
cassette tape  
(
page 20)  
Other  
equipment  
Follow the operation manual for the  
equipment.  
2 Insert a cassette tape. (  
42)  
page  
• When you want to record sound from other  
equipment, you cannot use the recording  
timer function to start playback on any  
equipment other than this product.  
3 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"TIMER1", "TIMER2" or "TIMER3".  
When you want to record an FM/AM radio  
broadcast  
Example: When "TIMER1" is selected  
• Press  
, and then press  
,
or  
the number buttons to select the preset  
number of the radio station whose broad-  
cast you want to record. Refer to "Using  
the number buttons" (  
page 16).  
Timer number  
11 Press  
.
4 Press  
5 Press  
.
• The settings appear in the display window.  
Confirm the settings.  
,
or  
to set the  
starting time and ending time.  
12 When the main unit is on, press  
to turn off the main unit.  
Example:To set the recording time from 6:30  
a.m. to 6:45 a.m.  
• While the recording timer is functioning, the  
volume is set to "0" and no sound is pro-  
duced from the speakers or headphones.  
• The recording timer is available only when  
the main unit is turned off.  
You can use the number buttons to set the  
recording time. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
• For setting the clock, refer to "Setting the  
Clock" ( page 16).  
page 16).  
NOTE  
• During operation, you can return to the previous  
Entering the "hour" →  
"minute" →  
Entering the  
step by pressing  
. You can quit the recording  
timer settings by pressing  
not stored.  
. The settings are  
6 Press  
or  
to select  
"ONCE" or "EVERYDAY".  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Convenient Functions  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 46.  
Playback Timer  
Canceling the recording timer  
In step 2 on page 47, select the timer number you  
want to cancel, and then press  
1 Prepare the sound source you  
want to play back.  
.
Even when you cancel the recording timer, the set-  
ting remains stored.  
Disc  
Make sure that a disc is loaded.  
page 21)  
(
Cassette  
tape  
Insert a cassette tape. (  
page 42)  
Activating the recording timer again  
Radio  
Preset the radio station whose broadcast  
you want to listen to. ( page 20)  
Follow the operation manual for the  
In step 2 on page 47, select the timer number you  
want to activate, and then press  
repeatedly  
Other  
until all of the setting procedure finishes. Then turn  
off the main unit.  
equipment equipment.  
NOTE  
2 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"TIMER1", "TIMER2" or "TIMER3".  
• When you want to activate two or three recording  
timers, leave a blank time of 2 or more minutes  
between the ending time of the first recording timer  
and the starting time of the second recording timer.  
If the blank time is less than 2 minutes, the second  
recording timer does not work.  
Example: When "TIMER2" is selected  
• When the power plug is disconnected or the  
power is cut, the recording timer settings may be  
lost. If the settings are lost, set the clock and  
recording timer again.  
Timer number  
3 Press  
4 Press  
.
,
or  
to set the  
starting time and ending time.  
Example: When you want to set the playback  
time from 7:00 a.m. to 7:30 a.m.  
You can use the number buttons to set the  
playback time. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
• For setting the clock, refer to "Setting the  
Clock" ( page 16).  
page 16).  
Entering the "hour" →  
"minute" →  
Entering the  
5 Press  
or  
to select  
"ONCE" or "EVERYDAY".  
ONCE  
: The playback timer works once.  
EVERYDAY : The playback timer works every  
day.  
6 Press  
7 Press  
"PLAY TIMER".  
.
or  
to select  
(Continued on next page)  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Using the Timers  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 46.  
8 Press  
.
10 Press  
11 Press  
.
9
Press  
or  
to select the  
or  
to adjust the  
sound source you want to play back.  
playback volume.  
Example: When you want to listen to an AM  
broadcast  
12 Press  
.
• The settings appear in the display window.  
13 When the main unit is turned on,  
press  
unit.  
to turn off the main  
• When you want to listen to sound from other  
equipment, you cannot use the playback  
timer function to start playback on any  
equipment other than this product.  
You cannot use the playback timer function  
together with program playback, repeat  
playback or random playback of a disc.  
• The playback timer is available only when  
the main unit is turned off.  
When you want to listen to an FM/AM radio  
broadcast  
NOTE  
• During operation, you can return to the previous  
• (With "FM" or "AM" selected) Press  
and then press or the num-  
ber buttons to select the preset number  
of the radio station whose broadcast you  
want to listen to ( page 20). Refer to  
,
step by pressing  
. You can quit the playback  
,
timer settings by pressing  
not stored.  
• When the playback timer starts, the volume  
gradually increases to the selected level.  
. The settings are  
"Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
Canceling the playback timer  
function  
When you want to play back a DVD VIDEO  
or DVD AUDIO  
In step 2 on page 48, select the timer number you  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
twice. Regardless of the displayed num-  
bers of group (G) and track (T), you can  
play back a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO  
only from the beginning of the disc.  
want to cancel, and then press  
Even when you cancel the playback timer, the set-  
ting remains stored.  
.
When you want to play back a CD, VCD or  
Activating the playback timer again  
In step 2 on page 48, select the timer number you  
SVCD  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
want to activate, and then press  
repeatedly  
twice, and then press  
,
or the  
until all of the setting procedure finishes. Then turn  
off the main unit.  
number buttons to select the number of a  
track (T) from which you want to start  
playback. Refer to "Using the number  
NOTE  
• When you want to activate two or three playback  
timers, leave a blank time of 2 or more minutes  
between the ending time of the first playback timer  
and the starting time of the second playback timer.  
If the blank time is less than 2 minutes, the second  
playback timer does not work.  
buttons" (  
number (G) is ignored.  
page 16). The group  
When you want to specify a track from  
which you want to start playback on an MP3  
or WMA  
• When the power plug is disconnected or the  
power is cut, the playback timer settings may be  
lost. If the settings are lost, set the clock and  
playback timer again.  
• When you operate the playback timer with a DVD  
VIDEO, DVD AUDIO or VCD, sound and video  
may not be played back automatically. A DVD  
VIDEO, DVD AUDIO or VCD may contain a disc  
menu that appears first when played back.  
Sound or video will not come out before you  
select the desired item to be played back on the  
disc menu.  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
press or the number buttons  
to select the group number (G) to be  
played back, press , and then press  
or the number buttons to  
,
,
,
select the track number (T) to be played  
back. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
page 16).  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Standby  
Disc Ejection Lock  
If no sound is produced for 3 minutes when the  
disc or cassette tape is selected as a sound  
source, the main unit automatically turns off.  
When the disc or cassette tape is selected  
as a sound source  
You can prohibit ejection of a disc.  
When the main unit is turned off  
While holding down , press  
the main unit.  
Press  
.
on  
"A. STANDBY" stands for "Auto Standby".  
Auto standby indicator  
Even if you press , "LOCKED" appears in the  
display window and the disc does not come out.  
In addition, when you press , while the main unit  
Auto standby performance  
When playback or recording finishes, auto standby  
starts the countdown (the "A. STANDBY" indicator  
flashes). When no operation is carried out within 3  
minutes, the main unit automatically turns off.  
When you start playback or recording within 3 min-  
utes, auto standby starts the countdown again  
after playback or recording finishes.  
When an operation other than playback and record-  
ing finishes and no operation is carried out within 3  
minutes, the main unit automatically turns off.  
"A. STANDBY OFF" indicator starts to flash 20  
seconds before the main unit is to turn off.  
is turned off, "LOCKED" appears in the display  
window and the main unit does not turn on.  
Canceling the disc ejection lock  
When the main unit is turned off  
Carry out the operation explained above once  
again.  
Canceling auto standby  
Press  
once again.  
NOTE  
• Leaving the volume at "0" is not the same as produc-  
ing no sound, and therefore does not start the auto  
standby function.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Using AV COMPU LINK  
The JVC AV COMPU LINK system allows you to  
enjoy video or audio with the simplest operation. If  
your JVC TV set supports the JVC AV COMPU  
LINK system, simply starting the main unit will  
automatically make all necessary settings on the  
TV to allow you to enjoy the playback.  
Operations  
You can enjoy sound or video simply by starting  
playback on the main unit. You do not have to  
select the input setting for the TV, or turn on the TV  
beforehand.  
Connection and Setting  
1 Turn on the main power to the TV.  
2 Insert a disc into the main unit.  
• Carefully read manuals of equipment to be  
connected.  
3 Press  
on the main unit.  
Audio cord with  
monaural mini-  
The following operation is performed auto-  
matically.  
plugs  
AV COMPU  
LINK -II or -III  
AV  
(not supplied)  
COMPU LINK  
• The TV set will be turned on.  
• TV input will be switched to external input  
(Video 1, 2 or 3) of the main unit.  
When you turn off the main unit, power to the  
TV is not turned off.  
JVC-made TV set  
Main unit  
Set the main unit's AV COMPU LINK MODE  
setting ( page 39) as follows.  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-1 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 2  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-2 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 3  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-3 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 1  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Convenient Functions/Reference  
Handling Discs/Cassette Tapes  
Handling discs  
Cleaning the main unit cabinet  
• Do not put adhesive tape or stickers, or write on  
a disc.  
• Do not bend a disc.  
• Be sure not to use heart/flower shaped discs or  
other irregularly shaped discs. The use of such  
discs damages the main unit.  
• Gently dust the cabinet surface with a soft dry  
cloth. When the cabinet is very dirty, dampen the  
cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water,  
wring out the cloth well, and then wipe the cabi-  
net with the dampened cloth followed by a soft  
dry cloth.  
• Do not wipe the cabinet with thinners or ben-  
zenes. Wiping it with these agents may cause  
discoloration of the cabinet or removal of the  
paint. Do not spray insecticides or other highly  
volatile agents onto the cabinet. Do not leave  
pieces of rubber or plastic on the cabinet for a  
long period.  
Cleaning discs  
Signal surface  
Wipe a disc from the  
center outward with a  
soft cloth.  
Scratches concentrated  
on a certain part cause  
sound dropout.  
• Be sure not to use thinners, benzenes, cleaners  
for analog records, or other chemical agents.  
Handling cassette tapes  
• A slack tape may become  
caught in the inner part of  
the main unit and dam-  
age the main unit.  
Before using a cas-  
sette tape, wind up  
any slack in the cas-  
sette tape as shown  
on the right. Do not pull out the tape  
or touch the tape's surface.  
Cleaning the tape deck head  
• Clean the head, pinch rollers and capstans  
approximately every 10 hours of playback time  
before the volume falls or sound quality  
deteriorates  
Cotton-tipped  
swab moistened  
with alcohol  
Capstans  
Pinch roller  
Head  
Pinch roller  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Reference  
Disc Messages  
Disc message  
Meaning  
Possible solution  
Replace the disc.  
You are trying to play back an unplayable disc or  
a disc that has many scratches.  
CANNOT PLAY  
NO DISC  
No disc is loaded.  
NO AUDIO  
The disc may be an illegally copied disc.  
You cannot listen to the disc.  
You are playing back a multi-channel track for  
which down-mix is prohibited.  
LR ONLY  
This is normal operation.  
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
page  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Possible solution  
Improper connection.  
Connect all cords properly.  
11-15  
8
No sound/video is  
produced.  
Headphones are connected.  
Disconnect the headphone plug.  
The clock display is  
flashing.  
A power failure occured or the  
power plug was disconnected.  
Reset the clock.  
16  
21  
Place the disc on the disc tray with  
the letter-printed surface facing up.  
The disc is upside down.  
Disc playback does not  
start.  
Leave the main unit turned on, wait  
for approximately 1 or 2 hours, and  
then operate the main unit.  
Moisture has condensed on the  
lens.  
3
A certain point cannot be  
played back properly.  
The disc is scratched or dirty.  
The head or capstans are dirty.  
Clean or replace the disc.  
Clean the head or capstans.  
Cancel the write-protection.  
Connect an antenna.  
52  
52  
The volume of cassette  
tape playback is low.  
You cannot record a  
cassette tape.  
The cassette tape is write-  
protected.  
44  
A radio broadcast cannot  
be received.  
No antenna is connected.  
11, 12  
The main unit is located close to a  
TV, computer, or other electric  
appliance.  
A whirring noise is  
produced.  
Place the main unit away from a TV,  
computer, or other electric appliance.  
3
You cannot set the timer. You did not set the clock.  
The timer does not work. The main unit is turned on.  
Set the clock.  
16  
After setting the timer, turn off the  
main unit.  
47, 49  
You cannot operate the  
remote control.  
The remote control batteries are  
running low.  
Replace the batteries with new  
batteries.  
9
You cannot operate the  
main unit with the number The remote control mode selector Set the remote control mode selector  
16  
buttons on the remote  
control.  
on the remote control is set to TV. to AUDIO.  
When you turn on the  
main unit, a noise comes The internal cooling fan produces The noise is not a malfunction. This is  
13, 17  
out from the rear of the  
main unit.  
the noise as it rotates.  
to prevent excessive heat.  
If this product does not function properly even after you have implemented the possible  
solutions given above  
Many functions of this product are implemented by microcomputers. If malfunction is caused by  
thunder or static electricity, or the main unit does not function properly even when you press a  
button, disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet, wait for a while, and then connect this  
product again. Then reset the clock.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
DVD receiver (CA-UXQD9S)  
Amplifier  
General  
Output power 20 W + 20 W at 4  
(10% THD)  
Input terminals  
Power requirement AC 240 V , 50 Hz  
Power consumption 70 W (at operation)  
1.3 W (on standby)  
<Analog> AUX×1,  
Dimensions 165 mm (W) × 200 mm (H)  
× 355 mm (D)  
Mass (approx.) 4.6 kg  
500 mV/47 k  
:LEVEL1  
:LEVEL2  
250 mV/47 k  
Output terminals  
<Analog> Speaker×1, 20 W/4  
Impedance 4 - 16  
Headphone (×1), 25 mW/32  
Impedance 16 - 1 k  
Speaker (SP-UXQD9S)  
System 3-way bass reflex type,  
Magnetically shielded type  
Speakers Woofer: 10 cm × 1  
Midrange: 4 cm × 1  
<Digital> DVD/CD optical input × 1  
-23 dBm to -15 dBm  
(Optical square terminal)  
Tweeter: 1.5 cm × 1  
Powerhandling 20 W  
capacity  
<Other> AV COMPU LINK × 2 ( 3.5)  
φ
Tuner  
Impedance 4  
Frequency range 55 Hz - 40 kHz  
Sound pressure 85 dB/W•m  
level  
Dimensions 140 mm (W) × 231 mm (H)  
× 204.5 mm (D)  
Mass (approx.) 2.2 kg  
(1 unit)  
Frequency FM:87.50 MHz - 108.00 MHz  
AM:531 kHz - 1 710 kHz  
(9 kHz spacing)  
530 kHz - 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz spacing)  
DVD player  
Micro component system  
(UX-QD9S)  
Playable discs DVD VIDEO, DVD AUDIO,  
CD, VCD, SVCD, CD-R/CD-  
RW (CD, VCD, SVCD, MP3/  
WMA/JPEG format), DVD-R/  
DVD-RW (video format)  
General  
Dimensions 445 mm (W) × 231 mm (H)  
× 355 mm (D)  
Cassette deck  
Mass (approx.) 9.0 kg  
Frequency response  
Normal (type I) 60 Hz - 14 000 Hz  
Wow and flutter 0.15% (WRMS)  
• U.S. and foreign patents licensed from Dolby  
Laboratories.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EN  
c
0904SKMMODJEM  
2004 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM  
微型组合音响  
UX-QD9S  
Consists of CA-UXQD9S and SP-UXQD9S  
CA-UXQD9S SP-UXQD9S 组成  
For hiding the demonstration  
display, refer to page 15.  
有关隐藏演示显示的详情,请参阅  
15 页。  
INSTRUCTIONS  
使用说明书  
LVT1220-006A  
[US]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Warnings, Cautions and Others  
/
警告,注意及其他须知事项  
CAUTION  
注意  
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:  
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.  
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.  
为了减少触电、火灾等危险:  
1. 请勿擅自卸下螺丝钉、盖子或机壳。  
2. 请勿让本机受雨淋或置于潮湿环境中。  
CAUTION — F button!  
注意F 开关!  
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off  
completely.  
想要完全关闭电源,须将电源插头从插座上拔下。  
F 键处于何种位置,主电路仍旧没有关闭。  
电源开关可用遥控器进行控制。  
The F button in any position does not disconnect the  
mains line.  
The power can be remote controlled.  
CAUTION  
注意  
切勿堵塞通风口或通风孔。  
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a  
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to  
get out.)  
(如果通风口或通风孔被报纸或布等物堵塞,热量将无  
法散出)  
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems  
must be considered and local rules or laws governing  
the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.  
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping  
or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such  
as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
切勿在本系统上放置明火,如点燃的蜡烛。  
想要丢弃电池时,务必考虑环保问题以及严格遵守当地  
关于处理废旧电池相关的法律规定和条例。  
切勿让本机受雨淋、受潮湿、落上或溅上水滴,亦勿在  
本机上面放置盛满液体的容器,如花瓶。  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS / 镭射产品的重要说明  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
1. 一级镭射产品。  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no  
user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all  
servicing to qualified service personnel.  
2. 请勿打开顶盖板机内部没有用户可自行维修  
的部件;所有维修工作应由有资格的人员完成。  
3. 当内部锁定装置失效或者损坏后开盖板可能  
会产生可见或不可见的镭射辐射。 应避免受到镭射光  
束的直接照射。  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when  
open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct  
exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL,  
PLACED INSIDE THE UNIT.  
4. 标签的复制标示意标签位于机内。  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION — Proper Ventilation  
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from  
damage, locate the apparatus as follows:  
正确的通风方法  
为了防止触电,火灾及避免损坏,  
按如下要求放置机器:  
Top/Front/Back/Sides:  
No obstructions should be placed in  
the areas shown by the dimensions  
below.  
/ / / 侧面: 在图中所示范围中,不应放置任何障  
碍物。  
Bottom:  
Place on the level surface. Maintain  
adequate air path for ventilation by  
placing on a stand with a height of  
10 cm or more.  
底部:  
放置在水平面上置在一个10 cm  
或更高的台上以保留足够的通风道。  
此外,如图所示,尽可能保持最佳的空气循环。  
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation.  
Front view  
前视图  
Side view  
侧视图  
Main unit  
本机  
15cm  
1cm  
1cm  
15cm  
15cm  
Main unit  
本机  
15cm  
Wall or  
obstructions  
墙壁或障碍物  
Front  
前面  
10cm  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
marks refer to operation used frequently. You can quickly learn the general usage of this  
product by reading those parts only.  
Introduction  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
..............................................  
Notes on Operation ............................. 3  
19  
Suitable Locations for the Main Unit.................  
Condensation....................................................  
Cleaning the Main Unit .....................................  
Listener’s Etiquette ...........................................  
Playable Disc Types .........................................  
Disc Structure ...................................................  
Selecting the Color System ..............................  
3
3
3
3
4
5
6
Setting the AM Tuner Spacing...................19  
Selecting a Radio Station ..........................20  
Storing Radio Stations (Preset) .................20  
Tuning In to a Preset Radio Station...........20  
Listening to Discs  
Special Cautions.................................. 7  
Notes on Handling ............................................  
Supplied Accessories .......................................  
7
7
Basic Operations of the DVD Player ...21  
Playback ................................  
21  
Playing Back from a Position 10 Seconds  
Preparation  
Before (One Touch Replay)...................23  
Part Description................................... 8  
Stopping Playback................. 24  
Resuming Playback (RESUME) ................24  
Pausing Playback ......................................24  
Advancing Picture Frame by Frame ..........24  
Fast Reverse/Fast Forward  
Remote Control ................................... 9  
Inserting Batteries into the Remote  
Control................................................... 9  
Operating the TV Using the Remote  
Search...............................  
24  
Control...................................................10  
Slow Motion Playback................................25  
Skipping to the Beginning of  
Connections.........................................11  
Connecting the Antennas ..........................11  
Connecting the Speakers ..........................13  
Connecting Other Equipment ....................14  
Connecting with a TV.................................14  
When a Clearer Picture Is Desired ............15  
Connecting the Power Plug .......................15  
a Track...............................  
25  
Skipping to the Beginning of a Track with  
the Number Buttons...............................25  
Selecting a Track from the Menu Screen ..25  
Convenient Functions of the DVD  
Player ................................................26  
Selecting the Audio................  
26  
Basic Operations  
Selecting the Subtitle.................................27  
Selecting a View Angle..............................27  
Magnifying the Picture (ZOOM).................27  
Adjusting the Picture Quality (VFP) ...........28  
Creating Realistic Sound (3D PHONIC) ....28  
Adjusting Playback Level (DVD LEVEL)....29  
Enjoying Better Pictures  
Basic Operations .................................16  
Setting the Clock........................................16  
Turning On/Off the Main Unit.  
Adjusting the Volume.............  
Temporarily Turning Off the Sound  
(FADE MUTING) ...................................17  
Emphasizing Heavy Bass Sound  
17  
17  
(PROGRESSIVE) ..................................29  
Playing Back the Bonus Group..................30  
Browsable Still Pictures (B.S.P.)................30  
Playing Back the Disc in the Desired Order  
(Program Playback)...............................31  
Random Playback......................................32  
Repeat Playback........................................33  
(AHB PRO)............................................17  
Adjusting the Sound Quality ......................17  
Changing the Color Patterns for  
the Display Window and Disc Tray........18  
Status Bar and Menu Bar....................34  
Using the Status Bar and Menu Bar ..........34  
Playing Back the Designated Part  
Repeatedly (A-B Repeat Playback).......35  
Designate the Time (Time Search)............35  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG  
Reference  
Discs..................................................36  
Playback ....................................................36  
Repeat Playback........................................37  
Handling Discs/Cassette Tapes ..........52  
Disc Messages....................................53  
Troubleshooting...................................53  
Specifications ......................................54  
Preferences .........................................38  
Basic Operations .......................................38  
LANGUAGE...............................................38  
PICTURE...................................................38  
AUDIO .......................................................39  
OTHERS....................................................39  
Country/Area Codes............................40  
Language Codes .................................41  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
..............................................  
42  
Listening to Other Equipment  
Listening to Other Equipment..............43  
Adjusting the Sound Input Level from  
Other Equipment ...................................43  
Recording Sound  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
..............................................  
44  
Quitting Recording.....................................45  
Recording Only One Track from a Disc.....45  
Recording the Second or Subsequent  
Track to the Last Track from a Disc.......45  
Program Recording from a Disc ................45  
Recording with No Blank Time between  
Tracks....................................................45  
Erasing Recorded Sound from  
a Cassette Tape....................................45  
Convenient Functions  
Using the Timers .................................46  
Sleep Timer ...............................................46  
Recording Timer ........................................47  
Playback Timer..........................................48  
Auto Standby.......................................50  
Disc Ejection Lock ...............................50  
Using AV COMPU LINK ......................51  
Connection and Setting .............................51  
Operations .................................................51  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Introduction  
Notes on Operation  
Suitable Locations for the  
Main Unit  
Cleaning the Main Unit  
When the operation panel becomes dirty, dust it  
with a soft dry cloth. When the operation panel is  
very dirty, wipe it with a cloth dampened with a  
small amount of a neutral detergent, and then wipe  
it with a soft dry cloth.  
To minimize the need for servicing and maintain  
the high quality of this product, do not place the  
main unit in the following locations:  
• In a position subject to high humidity or consid-  
erable dust  
CAUTION  
• On an uneven or unstable surface  
• Near a heat source  
• Near a computer, fluorescent light or other elec-  
tric appliance  
• Do not wipe the operation panel with thinners, ben-  
zenes or other chemical agents. Do not spray  
insecticides onto the operation panel. These may  
cause discoloration and damage to the surface.  
• In a small room with insufficient ventilation  
• In a position exposed to direct sunlight  
• In a position exposed to excessive cold  
• In a position exposed to strong vibration  
• Near a TV, other amplifier, or tuner  
• Near a magnetic source  
Listener's Etiquette  
When using headphones, keep the volume at a  
moderate level so as not to over-stimulate your  
ears.  
CAUTION  
When enjoying sound from the speakers,  
adjust the volume to a suitable level to  
avoid disturbing your neighbors.  
• The operating temperature of this product is 5°C to  
35°C. Use in temperatures outside this range may  
cause a malfunction or damage the product.  
Even low-volume sound carries a long way,  
especially at night. Show consideration to  
your neighbors by closing windows or using  
headphones.  
Condensation  
Under the following conditions, you may not be  
able to operate this product properly due to con-  
densation formed on the lens of the main unit:  
• When you have just started an air conditioner to  
warm your room  
• When you have placed the main unit at an area  
with high humidity  
• When you have moved the main unit from a cold  
place to a warm place  
When condensation forms, leave the main unit  
turned on, wait for approximately 1 or 2 hours, and  
then operate the main unit.  
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP Lossless", and the double-D symbol are trade-  
marks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• "DTS" and "DTS 2.0+DIGITAL OUT" are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• On some DVD VIDEOs, DVD AUDIOs, VCDs  
or SVCDs, their actual operation may be dif-  
ferent from what is explained in this manual.  
This is due to the disc programming and disc  
structure, not a malfunction of this product.  
Playable Disc Types  
This product has been designed to play back the  
following discs:  
DVD VIDEO, DVD AUDIO, VCD, SVCD, CD  
This product can also play back the following  
discs:  
• Finalized DVD-R/RW discs recorded in the DVD  
VIDEO format.  
About CD-Rs/CD-RWs  
You can play back a CD-R/CD-RW only  
when the disc is finalized.  
• CD-R/RW discs recorded in the following for-  
mats  
- Music CDs (finalized discs)  
- VCDs  
- SVCDs  
- MP3/WMA/JPEG discs recorded in ISO 9660 (for  
details, refer to "About MP3/WMA/JPEG discs")  
However, some discs may not be played back  
because of their disc characteristics, recording  
conditions, or damage or stain on them.  
Only sounds can be played back from the following  
discs:  
You can play back a CD-R/CD-RW which  
has been recorded in the audio CD for-  
mat and a CD-R/CD-RW to which audio  
data (MP3/WMA) or a still picture data  
(JPEG) file is recorded.  
However, playback is impossible in some  
cases due to the disc characteristics,  
recording condition, scratches or dirt on  
the disc, or dirt or condensation on the  
lens.  
• Before using a CD-R/CD-RW, carefully  
read the cautions regarding the disc.  
• This product does not support playback  
or CD text display of sound files such as  
MP3s.  
To play back a CD-RW on this product,  
erase all tracks if the CD-RW was  
recorded in a format other than the audio  
CD format. Using the CD-RW without  
erasing all tracks may result in damage to  
the speakers or other parts caused by  
sudden loud volume.  
MIX-MODE CD  
CD-EXTRA  
CD-G  
CD TEXT  
Discs you can play:  
Region  
Code  
Number*  
Video  
Format  
Disc Type  
Mark (Logo)  
DVD  
VIDEO  
PAL/  
NTSC  
3/ALL  
DVD  
AUDIO  
PAL/  
NTSC  
VCD  
Discs that cannot be played back  
PAL/  
NTSC  
• The following discs cannot be played back:  
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (recorded in  
VR format), CD-ROM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo  
CD, SACD, etc.  
Playing back these discs will generate noise and  
damage the speakers.  
• Damaged discs and discs in an extraordinary  
shape (other than a disc of 12 cm or 8 cm in  
diameter) cannot be played back.  
SVCD  
CD  
CD-R  
• JVC do not guarantee the operation and sound  
quality of discs not authorized by CD-DA, which  
is a CD specification.  
CD-RW  
Before playback, confirm that the disc complies  
with this CD specification by checking the marks  
and reading notes printed on the package.  
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
* Note on Region Code  
DVD players and DVD VIDEOs have their own  
region code numbers. This product can only play  
back a DVD VIDEO recorded with the region  
code number and video format mentioned  
above.  
Examples:  
If a DVD VIDEO with an improper region code  
number is loaded, "REGION CODE ERROR!"  
appears on the TV screen and playback cannot  
start.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Notes on Operation  
About MP3/WMA/JPEG discs  
Disc Structure  
Playable MP3/WMA/JPEG discs and files  
• Discs recorded in the ISO 9660 format are play-  
able (except discs recorded in the "packet write"  
format (UDF format)).  
• Discs recorded in the multi-session format are  
also playable.  
• Files with an extension of ".mp3", ".wma", ".jpg"  
or ".jpeg" (extensions with uppercase and lower-  
case letters mixed are also acceptable) are play-  
able.  
DVD VIDEO  
A DVD VIDEO consists of "titles" and each title  
may be divided into "chapters".  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG discs and files  
• A disc may not be played back, or reading it may  
take a long time depending on its recording con-  
ditions or properties.  
• The time needed for reading varies with the num-  
ber of groups or tracks (files) recorded on the disc.  
• If a character other than single byte English  
characters is used in the file name of an MP3/  
WMA/JPEG file, the track/file name will not be  
displayed correctly.  
• The order of tracks/groups displayed on the  
MP3/WMA Control screen, and the order of files/  
groups displayed on the JPEG Control screen  
may be different from that of files/folders dis-  
played on PC's monitor screen.  
DVD AUDIO  
A DVD AUDIO consists of "groups" and each  
group may be divided into "tracks".  
Some discs include a "bonus group" that requires  
a password for playing (  
page 30).  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 1  
Track 2  
VCD/SVCD/CD  
VCD, SVCD and CD consist of "tracks".  
• In the case of MP3/WMA discs, since groups/  
tracks are played back in alphabetical order, an  
off-the-shelf MP3/WMA disc may be played back  
in an order different from that indicated on the  
label attached to the disc.  
In general, each track has its own track number.  
(On some discs, each track may also be further  
divided by indexes.)  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
• Playing back an MP3/WMA file including a still  
image may take a long time. The elapsed time is  
not displayed until playing back starts. If playing  
back starts, the elapsed time may not be dis-  
played correctly.  
• For an MP3/WMA file, a disc with a sampling fre-  
quency of 44.1 kHz and transmission rate of 128  
kbps is recommended.  
MP3/WMA [JPEG] discs  
On an MP3/WMA [JPEG] disc, each still picture  
(material) is recorded as a track [file]. Tracks  
[Files] are usually grouped into a folder. Folders  
can also include other folders, creating hierarchical  
folder layers.  
This unit simplifies the hierarchical construction of  
a disc and manages folders by "groups".  
Up to 99 groups  
• This product is not compatible with MP3i or  
MP3PRO.  
• This product can play back a baseline JPEG file,  
excluding monochromatic JPEG files.  
• This product can play back JPEG data taken with a  
digital camera conforming to the DCF (Design  
Rule for Camera File System) standard (when a  
function is applied such as the automatic rotation  
function of a digital camera, data goes beyond the  
DCF standard, so the image may not be dis-  
played).  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Track 1 Track 2  
Group 3 Group 4 Group 5  
[File 1]  
[File 2]  
Up to 150 files  
• If data has been processed, edited and restored  
with PC image editing software, the data may  
not be displayed.  
This product can recognize up to 1 000 tracks  
[files] in a disc. Also, the product can recognize up  
to 150 tracks [files] per group and up to 99 groups  
in a disc. Since the unit ignores the tracks [files]  
whose numbers are exceeding 150 and the groups  
whose numbers are exceeding 99, they cannot be  
played back.  
• If there is any type of files other than MP3/WMA  
[JPEG] files in a disc, those tracks [files] are also  
counted in the total file number.  
• This product cannot play back animations such  
as MOTION JPEG, or still pictures (TIFF etc.)  
other than JPEG, and image data with sound.  
• The resolution of 640 x 480 pixels is recom-  
mended for JPEG files. If a file has been  
recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480  
pixels, display may take a long time. An image  
with a resolution of more than 8 192 x 7 680 pix-  
els cannot be displayed.  
• Files recorded on DVD-R/RW discs cannot be  
played back.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Color System  
This product is compatible with PAL and NTSC  
color systems.  
In standby mode, select PAL or NTSC to match  
your TV.  
If the VIDEO OUT SELECT switch is switched  
over when the power is on, turn off the power, and  
then turn it on again.  
• Before playing back a disc, it is also required to  
select the correct MONITOR TYPE in the  
PICTURE menu according to the aspect ratio of  
your TV (  
page 38).  
NOTE  
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set  
to "PAL", you can watch the playback pictures (the  
disc will be reproduced using "PAL 60" format), but  
the TV screen may rolls over upward and down-  
ward rapidly.  
NOTE  
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to  
"NTSC", you can watch the playback pictures, but  
the following symptoms may occur:  
• The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and  
be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.  
• The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from  
the original aspect ratio.  
• The picture movement is not smooth.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Special Cautions  
Avoid high temperatures  
Notes on Handling  
Do not expose the system to direct sunlight and do  
not place it near a heating equipment.  
Important cautions  
When you are away  
Installation of the system  
When away on travel or for other reasons for an  
extended period of time, disconnect the power  
cord plug from the wall outlet.  
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too  
hot nor too cold; between 5°C and 35°C.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the system  
and the TV.  
• Do not use the system in a place subject to  
vibration.  
Do not block the vents  
Blocking the vents may damage the system.  
Care of the cabinet  
When cleaning the system, use a soft cloth and fol-  
low the relevant instructions on the use of chemi-  
cally-coated cloths. Do not use benzene, thinner or  
other organic solvents including disinfectants.  
These may cause deformation or discoloring.  
Power cord  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands!  
• A small amount of power is always consumed  
while the power cord is connected to the wall  
outlet.  
• When unplugging the power cord from the wall  
outlet, always pull on the plug, not the power  
cord.  
If water gets inside the system  
Turn the system off and disconnect the power cord  
plug from the wall outlet, then call the store where  
you made your purchase. Using the system in this  
condition may cause fire or electrical shock.  
To prevent malfunctions of the system  
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If  
anything goes wrong, unplug the power cord and  
consult your dealer.  
When condensation or water drops adhere  
to the lens  
• Do not insert any metallic object into the system.  
• Do not use any non-standard shape disc (like a  
heart, flower or credit card, etc.) available on the  
market, because it may damage the system.  
• Do not use a disc with tape, stickers, or paste on  
it, because it may damage the system.  
In any of the following cases, condensation or  
water drops may adhere to the lens to prevent the  
system from working properly:  
• Immediately after roomheating starts  
• When the system is installed in a steamy or  
damp space  
• When the system is suddenly moved from a cold  
place to a warm space  
Label sticker  
In any of these cases, leave the system turned on  
for 1 or 2 hours before use.  
Sticker  
Supplied Accessories  
Paste  
Check to be sure you have all of the supplied  
accessories.  
The number in parentheses is the quantity of the  
pieces supplied. If anything is missing, contact  
your dealer immediately.  
Note about copyright laws  
Check the copyright laws in your country before  
recording from CDs. Recording of copyrighted  
material may infringe copyright laws.  
Remote control (1)  
Batteries (2)  
Safety precautions  
FM antenna (1)  
AM loop antenna (1)  
Video cord (1)  
Avoid moisture, water and dust  
Do not place the system in moist or dusty places.  
AC plug adaptor (1)  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights  
owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is  
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introcution/Preparation  
The numbers refer to the pages in which the parts are explained.  
Part Description  
18  
20  
21  
22  
17  
28  
42, 44  
30  
46-49 17  
50  
31-33  
21  
20  
42  
43  
Cassette holder: 42  
PUSH-OPEN  
17  
44  
28  
15, 18  
21  
17  
Remote control sensor: 9  
*
25, 30, 37, 45 24, 42  
Disc tray: 21  
* This terminal is for connecting a pair of headphones equipped with a stereo mini plug (not supplied). While  
the headphones are connected, the speakers do not produce any sound.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Preparation  
The numbers refer to the pages in which the parts are explained.  
Remote Control  
Inserting Batteries into the  
Remote Control  
17  
28  
17  
17  
10  
10  
20  
17  
18  
43  
42  
18  
21  
24  
10  
17  
10  
10, 16  
24, 42  
24, 42,  
47-49  
24, 25, 42  
R6P (SUM-3) /AA (15F)  
type dry-cell batteries (2)  
24, 42  
,
47-49  
25, 30,  
37, 45  
25  
25  
22, 25-28,  
30  
22, 25-28,  
30  
34  
50  
38  
46  
16, 47  
16  
23  
20, 47-49  
16, 20, 25,  
31, 35  
32  
42, 44  
33  
20, 31  
CAUTION  
• Do not use a used battery and a new battery  
together.  
• Do not use different types of batteries at the  
17  
17  
same time.  
27  
26  
27  
27  
Take out the batteries if the remote control is not  
to be used for a long time. Otherwise it may  
cause a leakage.  
23  
28, 29  
30  
29  
Remote control operation  
• When operating the remote control, point it at  
the front panel of the main unit.  
Opening the cover  
• The effective distance between the remote con-  
trol and the remote control sensor on the main  
unit is approximately 5 m maximum.  
• When the effective distance decreases, replace  
the batteries.  
• Do not drop the remote control or subject it to  
excessive shock.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0).  
This page is for when operating your TV using  
the remote control of this product.  
Examples:  
For a Hitachi TV: Press 1, then 0.  
For a Toshiba TV: Press 0, then 8.  
If there are two or more manufacturer's codes, try  
them in turn and select the one that causes the  
product to work properly.  
Operating the TV Using the  
Remote Control  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code  
01  
Manufacturer  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Code  
12  
Hitachi  
10  
13  
06  
07  
08  
09  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
02  
Sharp  
03  
Sony  
04, 11  
14  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
RCA  
05  
5 Release  
.
NOTE  
• The manufacturer's codes may be changed without  
notice. You may not be able to operate a TV  
produced by the manufacturer shown above.  
Number buttons  
For TV operation  
Operate the remote control by pointing it towards  
the TV.  
Turn on/off the power.  
Change channels.  
Setting the manufacturer's code  
1 Slide the remote control mode  
selector to the TV side.  
Adjust volume.  
2 Hold down  
.
-
/
/
Select channels.  
NOTE  
*1  
• Hold down  
until step 4 is completed.  
Change between the previously  
selected channel and the cur-  
rent channel.  
3 Press  
and release.  
Change between TV and video  
input.  
*1 Make sure to slide the remote control mode selector  
to the TV side in advance.  
NOTE  
• When the batteries are replaced, perform the  
manufacturer's code setting again.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
Connections  
Connecting the Antennas  
When radio reception with the supplied AM  
loop antenna is poor  
Connecting the AM antenna  
Vinyl-covered wire: 3 - 5 m  
(not supplied)  
1 Set up the AM antenna (supplied).  
Insert the tab into  
the slot.  
Twist together vinyl-  
covered wire and the AM  
loop antenna cord.  
Stretch out the vinyl-  
covered wire horizontally,  
preferably in a high place  
such as above a window  
or outdoors.  
Connect the AM loop  
antenna cord to the main  
unit together with the  
vinyl-covered wire.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
Main unit (side view)  
Main unit (rear view)  
Main unit (rear view)  
Connecting the antenna  
cord  
When insulation  
covers the tips of  
the antenna cord,  
twist and pull off  
the insulation.  
Connect the ends of  
the antenna cord as  
shown above.  
3 Turn the AM loop antenna to find  
the best position for radio  
reception.  
Place the AM loop antenna as far  
from the main unit as possible.  
• Do not place the AM loop antenna on a  
metallic table or close to a TV, computer, or  
other electric appliances. Doing so may  
affect radio reception.  
When positioning the antennas, find the best position for reception while listening to an actual radio program  
(refer to "Listening to Radio Broadcasts" (  
page 19)).  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When radio reception with the supplied FM  
antenna is poor, or when using a communal  
antenna  
Connecting the FM antenna  
Main unit (rear view)  
Main unit (side view)  
FM antenna  
(supplied)  
Main unit  
(rear view)  
Main unit (side view)  
Communal  
antenna terminal  
Antenna cord  
(not supplied)  
Stretch out the FM antenna to the best position for  
radio reception, and then fix it with adhesive tape.  
or  
Outdoor FM antenna  
(not supplied)  
Coaxial cable  
(not supplied)  
When using an antenna other than those  
supplied with this product, refer to the operation  
manuals for the antenna for details of  
connection.  
When positioning the antennas, find the best position for reception while listening to an actual radio program  
(refer to "Listening to Radio Broadcasts" ( page 19)).  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Connections  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
Connecting the Speakers  
After connecting the speakers, gently pull on the  
speaker cords to make sure the cords are firmly  
connected and do not pull out.  
Main unit (rear view)  
Speaker cord  
Speaker cord  
Speaker cord  
Red  
Red  
Black  
Black  
Left speaker (rear view)  
Right speaker (rear view)  
CAUTION  
You can detach the speaker cover.  
• Do not short-circuit the  
and  
speaker termi-  
nals. Doing so may damage the speakers.  
• Do not connect other speakers together with the  
supplied speakers. The change in impedance  
may damage the main unit and the speakers.  
• The speakers of this product are magnetically  
shielded, but color irregularities may occur on the  
TV depending on how the speakers are installed.  
Keep in mind the following.  
Speaker  
cover  
1. Turn off the main power of your TV before  
installing the speakers. Wait for about 30 min-  
utes before turning on the TV again.  
2. If color irregularity occurs in pictures, keep a  
distance of more than 10 cm between the TV  
and the speakers.  
NOTE  
• Improper speaker cord connection spoils the stereo  
effect and sound quality.  
• The impedance of speakers connected to this  
product must be within the range of 4 to 16 .  
• Cooling fan is built into the main unit for emitting  
generated heat. When you turn on the main unit,  
the internal cooling fan automatically starts  
rotating. To ensure sufficient cooling, leave a  
space of more than 1 cm between the main unit  
and the speakers or other objects.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
Connecting Other Equipment  
• For details of signals to be output, refer to page 39.  
• If connecting the main unit to equipment that has  
the function of a Dolby Digital decoder, the set-  
ting in "D. RANGE COMPRESSION" of "AUDIO"  
Read this section when connecting other audio  
equipment to this product.  
(
page 39) will be invalid regarding sound  
from the digital audio output of the main unit.  
Other audio  
equipment  
Connecting with a TV  
TV  
Supplied video cord  
VIDEO IN  
Main unit  
VIDEO  
CAUTION  
• Connect the main unit directly with a TV (or a  
monitor) without routing through a VCR. Otherwise  
it may cause picture distortion while playing back.  
(Such picture distortion is caused by a copy  
protection system, and thus it is not a malfunction.)  
TV  
Audio cord (not supplied)  
Main unit  
VCR  
(or monitor)  
Connecting directly  
CAUTION  
Also, if the main unit is connected to a TV with a  
built-in VCR, there may be picture distortion during  
playback.  
• Before connecting other equipment, turn off both  
the main unit and the equipment.  
NOTE  
Connecting with digital equipment  
• Please check that the setting for VIDEO OUT  
SELECT (PAL/NTSC) on the rear panel of the main  
unit and the color system on your TV set are the  
AV amplifier with a built-in  
decoder (not supplied)  
same. (  
page 6)  
You need to set "MONITOR TYPE" in the  
"PICTURE" menu correctly according to the aspect  
To an optical digital input  
terminal  
ratio of your TV. (  
page 38)  
Optical digital cable  
(not supplied)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Connections  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
When a Clearer Picture Is  
Desired  
Connecting the Power Plug  
Main unit (rear view)  
AC outlet  
You can enjoy pictures of better quality using the  
following cord instead of the supplied video cord.  
Connecting by using the S-video cord  
S-video cord  
TV  
Main unit  
(not supplied)  
• After making all other necessary connections,  
connect in the power plug.  
S-VIDEO  
Connect the ends of S-video cord making  
sure that each end matches its compatible  
terminal.  
NOTE  
• The preset setting such as preset channels and  
sound adjustment may be erased in a few days in  
the following cases:  
- When you disconnect the power plug.  
- When a power failure occurs.  
Connecting by using the component  
video cord  
You can enjoy better quality pictures than when  
using the S-video cord.  
TV  
Demonstration display function  
When you connect the power plug into the AC  
outlet, "DEMO START!" appears in the display  
window and the demonstration display starts.  
When you press  
on the main unit, "DEMO  
OFF" appears in the display window and the  
demonstration display is canceled.  
Turning on the main unit automatically cancels the  
demonstration display.  
Component video cord  
(not supplied)  
Resuming the demonstration display  
With the power turned off, press  
unit.  
on the main  
Hiding the demonstration display  
With the power turned off, hold down  
until "DEMO CLEAR" appears.  
Disconnecting and then reconnecting the  
power plug does not start the demonstration  
display.  
Main unit  
CAUTION  
To activate the demonstration display again,  
• Use one of either the S-video cord or the  
component video cord. If both cords are used,  
pictures may not be played back properly.  
hold down  
appears.  
until "DEMO START!"  
NOTE  
• In order to enjoy pictures with the progressive  
mode (  
page 29), the TV is required to have  
progressive video input.  
• If the component video input jacks of your TV are  
BNC type, use a plug adapter (not supplied) to  
convert the plugs.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation/Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
This manual explains the operations assuming that  
you will use the remote control. Some buttons on  
the main unit are the same as those on the remote  
control. You can use either button in this case.  
2 Set the hour.  
Back  
Next  
• Holding down the button causes the hour to  
increment.  
You can use the number buttons to specify  
the hour.  
Refer to "Using the number buttons" shown  
below.  
Using the number buttons  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Examples: 3:  
13:  
20:  
23:  
3 Press  
.
Number buttons  
To return to step 2, press  
.
4 Set the minute in the same manner  
as steps 2 and 3.  
Adjusting the clock  
Press  
four times to display the clock, and  
then adjust the clock starting from step 2.  
CAUTION  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Displaying the clock while using the  
main unit  
Setting the Clock  
Press  
repeatedly.  
NOTE  
You can set the clock while the main unit is turned  
either on or off.  
Example: To set the clock to 10:10 a.m.  
• The time display on the main unit is a 24-hour  
clock.  
• The clock will gain or lose approximately 1 minute  
per month.  
• Set the clock again after you have disconnected  
the power plug or a power cut has occurred.  
1 Press  
.
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations  
Turning On/Off the Main Unit  
Adjusting the Sound Quality  
Selecting the sound mode  
Press  
(or  
on the main unit).  
• With the power off, pressing either button  
also turns on the main unit. The function  
assigned to the button starts working at the  
same time.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
Remote control:  
Main unit:  
: For emphasizing treble  
and bass sounds.  
: Adequate for songs  
and narrations.  
NOTE  
• Cooling fan is built into the main unit for emitting  
generated heat. When you turn on the main unit,  
the internal cooling fan automatically starts rotating.  
: For emphasizing treble  
sound.  
: For uplifting a feeling  
of being at a live per-  
formance.  
Adjusting the Volume  
: For adjusting treble and  
bass sounds of your  
choice (shown below).  
: Cancels the sound  
mode (initial setting).  
Press  
.
• While the sound mode is set to an item other  
You can also adjust the volume by turning  
the VOLUME control on the main unit.  
than "FLAT",  
is displayed in the  
display window.  
NOTE  
• You can adjust the volume within the range of 0 to  
40.  
NOTE  
• This function does not affect recording sound.  
Temporarily Turning Off the  
Sound (FADE MUTING)  
Adjusting bass/treble sound  
1 Press  
"MANUAL".  
2 For adjusting bass sound;  
Press  
For adjusting treble sound;  
Press  
repeatedly to display  
Press  
.
• "FADE MUTING" appears and the volume  
reduces to "0".  
To return to the previous volume, press  
.
again.  
Emphasizing Heavy Bass  
Sound (AHB PRO)  
.
You can adjust the sound quality within the  
range of -5 to +5.  
• The display returns to the sound source dis-  
play in a few seconds.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, AHB PRO  
NOTE  
function toggles between "ON" and  
"OFF".  
• While AHB PRO function is activated,  
• While the sound mode is set to an item other than  
"MANUAL", "NO OPERATE" is displayed in the dis-  
play window and you cannot adjust bass/treble  
sound.  
is displayed in the display  
window.  
• "AHB PRO" stands for "Active Hyper  
Bass PRO".  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 16.  
Changing the Color Patterns  
3 Press  
to adjust the intensity  
for the Display Window and  
Disc Tray  
of the component color.  
You can also adjust the color intensity by turn-  
ing the VOLUME control on the main unit.  
Press  
(or  
on the main unit).  
You can adjust the color intensity within the  
range of "0" to "3".  
You cannot set all three component colors  
(red, green, and blue) to "0" at the same time.  
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
: For a rainbow-like  
pattern.  
NOTE  
• After you have adjusted each component color, the  
display returns to the sound source display in  
approximately 8 seconds.  
• You cannot set different colors for the display  
window and disc tray.  
: For a flower-image  
pattern.  
• When you operate a button on the main unit or  
remote control, the display window and disc tray  
light in pale blue for approximately 2 seconds.  
• When recording finishes, the color of the display  
window and disc tray switches to the color set in  
"MANUAL" to inform you that recording has  
finished. (With an item other than "MANUAL"  
selected)  
: Gradually changes  
the color pattern in a  
cycle of approximately  
20 seconds.  
: For an ocean-image  
pattern.  
When you operate the main unit after recording  
finishes, the color pattern for the display window  
and disc tray returns to the selected pattern.  
: For a fantasy pattern.  
: For the color of your  
choice. (The setting  
shown on the left is  
initial setting.)  
Changing the brightness of the  
display window and disc tray  
(DIMMER)  
Press  
.
Setting your favorite color for the  
display window and disc tray  
• Each time you press  
as follows.  
, the display toggles  
1 Press  
"MANUAL".  
2 Press  
component color.  
repeatedly to display  
: Color pattern becomes  
dimmer.  
or  
to select a  
: Color pattern  
becomes darker, and  
switches to blue.  
: DIMMER 2 is automat-  
ically selected during  
video playback, and is  
canceled when the  
playback stops.  
: Cancels the brightness  
• Numerical value of the selected component  
color flashes.  
adjustment  
(initial setting).  
NOTE  
• Once you press  
to change the color pattern,  
the brightness returns to the initial setting. (except  
for DIMMER AUTO)  
• When you turn off the main unit, the brightness  
also returns to the initial setting.  
• You cannot turn off the color pattern.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
This product can receive FM and AM radio  
broadcasts.  
Setting the AM Tuner Spacing  
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart,  
and other countries use 10 kHz spacing.  
On the main unit ONLY:  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Number buttons  
When the main unit is turned off  
To select 10 kHz spacing, while holding down  
on the main unit, press  
on the main unit to turn  
on the power. "AM 10 kHz" appears in the display  
window.  
To select 9 kHz spacing, while holding down  
on  
the main unit, press on the main unit to turn on  
the power. "AM 9 kHz" appears in the display  
window.  
NOTE  
• If the spacing is switched, the memory in which the  
radio stations were stored will be erased.  
CAUTION  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting a Radio Station  
Storing Radio Stations  
(Preset)  
1 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"FM" or "AM".  
You can store up to 30 FM radio stations and up to  
15 AM radio stations.  
Example: Display while an FM radio broadcast  
is received  
While the broadcast from the radio station  
you want to preset is being received  
Preset number (  
on the right)  
Stereo indicator  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
Frequency  
2 Press  
.
• The preset number flashes for approxi-  
mately 5 seconds.  
2 Press  
or  
repeatedly to  
select a radio station (frequency).  
You can also select a radio station using the  
automatic tuning.  
3 While the preset number is flash-  
ing, press the number buttons (  
Automatic tuning:  
-
or  
) to select the preset  
Hold down  
or  
until the fre-  
number you want to use.  
quency starts changing, and then release  
the button.  
When the main unit has received a broad-  
cast, the frequency automatically stops  
changing.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
4 While the selected number is  
flashing, press  
To quit the function while searching for a  
.
• "STORED" appears and the selected radio  
station is stored.  
broadcast, press  
or  
.
• When the main unit has received an FM  
stereo broadcast, "STEREO" lights up.  
NOTE  
• When you store a radio station to a preset number  
to which another radio station has previously been  
stored, the newly set radio station replaces the pre-  
viously stored radio station.  
NOTE  
• If an FM stereo broadcast is difficult to hear  
because of noise, you may be able to hear more  
easily by pressing  
to switch the sound to  
monaural reception. In this case, "MONO" lights up.  
To return the sound to stereo reception, press  
Tuning In to a Preset Radio  
Station  
again or select another FM radio station.  
• This product is not compatible with AM stereo  
broadcasts.  
While an FM or AM broadcast is being  
received  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
2 Use the number buttons to select  
the preset number of the radio sta-  
tion to which you want to tune in.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Discs  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
How to read this manual  
Playback  
• Operations are described by mainly using the  
remote control buttons. If there are the same  
marks on the main unit, the buttons on the main  
unit can also be used.  
• The following marks tell you for which type of the  
discs the operation can be made.  
(Refer to page 36 for playing back MP3/WMA and  
JPEG.)  
1 Press  
on the main unit.  
• The disc tray comes out.  
2 Place a disc on the disc tray.  
• The illustrations and TV screens may be different  
between the actual case and the description.  
• "VCD" stands for "Video CD".  
• "SVCD" stands for "Super Video CD".  
Letter-printed surface  
Disc tray  
• When you want to listen to an 8 cm disc,  
place it on the inner hollow of the disc tray.  
Remote control  
mode selector  
3 Press  
.
Display for DVD VIDEO  
Display while a DVD VIDEO is being played  
back:  
DVD indicator  
(The DVD indicator lights up while the DVD VIDEO is  
stopped. The DVD indicator flashes while the DVD  
VIDEO is being played back or paused.)  
Title number  
Chapter number  
Number buttons  
Elapsed playing time  
Display while the DVD VIDEO is stopped:  
Total number of titles  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display for CD  
Display for VCD/SVCD  
Display while a CD is being played back:  
Display while a VCD/SVCD is being played  
back:  
CD indicator  
(The CD indicator lights up while the CD is  
stopped. The CD indicator flashes while the  
CD is being played back or paused.)  
VCD indicator  
(The VCD indicator lights up while the VCD/SVCD  
is stopped. The VCD indicator flashes while the  
VCD/SVCD is being played back or paused.)  
Track number  
Elapsed playing time  
PBC indicator  
Track number  
(
page 23)  
Display while the CD is stopped:  
Total playing time  
Total number of tracks  
Elapsed playing time  
• PBC indicator is displayed while PBC is acti-  
vated.  
Display while the VCD/SVCD is stopped:  
Total number of tracks (*1, *2)  
Display for DVD AUDIO  
Display while a DVD AUDIO is being played  
back:  
DVD indicator  
(The DVD indicator lights up while the DVD AUDIO is  
stopped. The DVD indicator flashes while the DVD  
AUDIO is being played back or paused.)  
Group number  
Total playing time  
*1 "1" will appear after the total number of  
tracks is displayed.  
*2 "PBC" will appear when the disc is PBC-  
compatible.  
Track number  
NOTE  
• The menu may appear in the display window after  
DVD playback starts. In such a case, select the  
desired menu item by using the following buttons  
on the remote control.  
Elapsed playing time  
Display while the DVD AUDIO is stopped:  
Total number of groups  
• Select a menu item with  
,
or  
,
and then press  
.
• Select a menu item with the number buttons.  
• Operation may differ from the explanation given  
here, depending on the disc type.  
• "G1" and "T1" will appear after the total  
number of groups is displayed.  
(Continued on next page)  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Discs  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
Messages displayed on the TV screen  
While a DVD is selected as the sound  
source, the messages shown below are dis-  
played, depending on the status.  
PBC (Playback control)  
• PBC is a signal recorded in a VCD (ver-  
sion 2.0) for controlling VCD playback.  
You can operate software that has inter-  
active or search functions using the menu  
display recorded in a PBC-compatible  
VCD. To play back a VCD without PBC,  
follow the operation below.  
NOW READING  
The main unit is reading the disc. Wait for a  
while.  
• Select the desired track number with the  
number buttons while playback is  
stopped.  
REGION CODE ERROR!  
The disc cannot be played back because its  
region code is not compatible. (  
page 4)  
• While playback is stopped, press  
NO DISC  
or  
to select the desired track num-  
No disc is loaded.  
OPEN  
The disc tray is opening.  
ber, and then press  
• While a VCD or SVCD is being played  
.
CLOSE  
The disc tray is closing.  
back, press  
menu group.  
to return to the higher  
CANNOT PLAY  
You are trying to play back an unplayable  
disc.  
Playing Back from a Position  
10 Seconds Before  
(One Touch Replay)  
Guide icons temporarily displayed on  
the TV screen (on-screen guide)  
While a disc is being played back  
: Play  
(
Press  
.
page 21)  
: Pause  
NOTE  
(
page 24)  
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
• You cannot return to the previous title.  
: Fast reverse/Fast forward search  
(
page 24)  
:
Slow motion playback (reverse/  
forward directions)( page 25)  
: Containing multi-angle views  
page 27)  
(
: Containing multi-audio  
page 26)  
(
: Containing multi-subtitle  
page 27)  
(
: The disc cannot accept the operation  
you have attempted.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 21.  
Stopping Playback  
Pausing Playback  
While a disc is being played back  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
Press  
.
Resuming Playback (RESUME)  
To resume normal playback, press  
.
• Playback cannot be paused by pressing  
on the main unit during JPEG disc slide-show.  
When playback is stopped in the middle, playback  
can be started from the stopped scene.  
Advancing Picture Frame by  
Frame  
How to suspend playback  
While a disc is being played back  
Perform any of the following operations during  
playback.  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is paused  
Press  
Press  
once.*  
Press  
.
to turn off the power.  
• Each time you press  
, picture will be  
advanced frame by frame.  
Change the source to FM/AM or AUX.*  
You cannot operate this function with  
the main unit.  
on  
* Even if the power is turned off by pressing  
after this, the position where playback has  
been stopped will be stored.  
Fast Reverse/Fast Forward  
Search  
How to start playback from the stored  
position  
There are two methods.  
Press  
.
While a disc is being played back  
NOTE  
Press  
or  
.
• This function does not work in program playback or  
random playback.  
• The position where playback starts again may be  
a little different from the stopped position.  
• When a disc menu is displayed, the resume func-  
tion may not work.  
• The audio, the subtitle and the angle at that time  
are stored as well as the stopped position.  
• The stored position will be cleared if the disc tray  
• Each time you press  
increases as shown below.  
or  
, the speed  
×2 ×5 ×10  
×20  
×60  
To restore the normal speed, press  
.
Hold down  
or  
.
is opened. Further, if  
is pressed during  
is  
• Fast reverse/fast forward search can be car-  
ried out only while the button is pressed.  
playback, "RESUME" appears. If  
pressed at this time, "RESUME" will disappear  
and the stored information will be cleared.  
• Resume function is set to on as the initial  
preset. You can set the function to off  
NOTE  
• For a DVD VIDEO, SVCD or VCD, no sound comes  
out during fast reverse/fast forward search.  
• For a CD or DVD AUDIO, sound is intermittent  
during fast reverse/fast forward search.  
(
page 39).  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 21.  
2 Press the number buttons (  
-
Slow Motion Playback  
or  
) to select the track/chapter  
you want to listen to.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is paused  
NOTE  
• You can operate a VCD or SVCD while the disc is  
stopped or played back with PBC off.  
• You can operate a DVD AUDIO, CD, MP3, WMA,  
or JPEG while the disc is either played back or  
stopped.  
Press  
or  
.
• Each time you press  
increases as shown below.  
, the speed  
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
/
16  
8
32  
4
2
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
• Press  
to pause playback, and press  
to resume normal playback.  
Selecting a Track from the  
Menu Screen  
NOTE  
• No sound will be produced.  
• The picture motion in the reverse direction may  
not be smooth.  
• For a VCD or SVCD, slow motion playback can  
be carried out in the forward direction only.  
While a disc is stopped or being played  
back*  
Skipping to the Beginning of a  
Track  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
While a disc is being played back*  
2 Press  
or  
.
Press  
or  
.
• A menu screen of the disc appears.  
• Each time you press  
chapter/track/file skips to the beginning of the  
previous chapter/track/file.  
, the current  
• Only  
can be used for DVD AUDIOs.  
3 Press  
(only for a  
• Each time you press  
, the current chapter/  
track/file skips to the beginning of the next  
chapter/track/file.  
DVD VIDEO or a DVD AUDIO) or  
the number buttons to select a  
track you want to listen to.  
• Press  
group.  
or  
to select a title or  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
NOTE  
• If there are two or more pages of menu  
* For a VCD or SVCD, this operation can be carried  
out only during playback without the PBC function.  
• Except for a DVD VIDEO, this operation can also  
be carried out while the disc is stopped.  
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
screen, press or to change the  
pages (only for a VCD or SVCD).  
4 Press  
.
NOTE  
* You can operate a VCD or SVCD while PBC is set  
to off.  
• You cannot perform this function with discs to  
which a menu screen is not recorded.  
• Some disc may start playback even if you do not  
Skipping to the Beginning of a  
Track with the Number Buttons  
press  
.
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Discs  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Selecting the Audio  
While a disc containing two or more audio  
is being played back  
AUDIO  
Remote control  
mode selector  
1 Press  
.
Example: TV screen  
Selected audio/Total  
number of audio  
Selected audio  
• Each time you press AUDIO , the audio will  
be changed. The audio can also be  
changed by pressing  
.
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
Number buttons  
NOTE  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
menu bar (  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to "Lan-  
guage Codes" ( page 41).  
page 34).  
• When 2 channel sounds are recorded in 1/2 and  
multi channel sounds with down-mix prohibited  
are recorded in 2/2 in a DVD AUDIO, you can  
select 1/2 only.  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Selecting the Subtitle  
Selecting a View Angle  
(only for moving image)  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc containing two or more subti-  
tles is being played back  
While a disc containing two or more view  
angles is being played back  
1 Press  
Example: TV screen  
.
1 Press  
Example: TV screen  
.
Selected view angle/  
Total number of view  
angles  
Selected subtitle/Total  
number of subtitles  
(When no subtitle is  
set in the disc, "--"  
appears.)  
Selected  
view angle  
Selected subtitle  
(When no  
subtitle is set in  
the disc, "OFF"  
appears.)  
• Each time you press  
be changed. The angle can also be  
changed by pressing  
, the angle will  
.
2 Press  
subtitle.  
to select a  
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
3 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
NOTE  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
NOTE  
menu bar (  
page 34).  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
menu bar (  
page 34).  
Magnifying the Picture (ZOOM)  
• For an SVCD, each time you press  
in step  
1, the subtitle type and ON/OFF will be changed.  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to "Lan-  
guage Codes" (  
• The manner of displaying subtitles may be differ-  
ent depending on the disc.  
page 41).  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is played back or paused  
1 Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, the picture  
Canceling the subtitle  
magnification will be changed (OFF,  
ZOOM1 - 6).  
Press  
to select "OFF".  
• When a JPEG disc is used, the picture  
magnification changes through "ZOOM  
1", "ZOOM 2" to "OFF". You cannot  
change the picture magnification during  
slide-show playback.  
2 Select the portion you want to see  
by pressing  
.
CAUTION  
• When you magnify a picture, image quality may be  
deteriorated or image may be distorted.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Example:  
Adjusting the Picture Quality  
(VFP)  
5 Press  
value.  
to change the  
While a disc is played back or paused  
6 Press  
.
1 Press  
.
To adjust other items, go back to step 3.  
Example: TV screen  
7 Press  
.
Current VFP mode  
USER1  
NOTE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
• If no operation is made for several seconds during  
the procedure, the settings made so far will be  
automatically stored.  
• "VFP" stands for "video fine processor".  
Creating Realistic Sound  
(3D PHONIC)  
Setting items  
GAMMA  
: Controls the brightness of neutral  
tints while maintaining the  
brightness of dark and light  
portions.  
The two speakers produce an effect resembling  
surround-sound.  
(Setting range: –3 - +3)  
BRIGHTNESS: Controls the brightness of the  
display.  
(Setting range: –8 - +8)  
CONTRAST : Controls the contrast of the  
display.  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
Example: TV screen  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
SATURATION : Controls the saturation of the  
display.  
3D PHONIC  
ACTION  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
: Controls the tint of the display.  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
SHARPNESS : Controls the sharpness of the  
display.  
• Each time you press  
as follows.  
, the display toggles  
TINT  
: Suitable for action movies,  
sport programs or other  
lively programs.  
ACTION  
(Setting range: –8 - +8)  
: You can relax with a natural  
atmosphere.  
DRAMA  
2 Press  
to select VFP mode.  
NORMAL  
: For normal playback.  
: You can enjoy the sound  
effect as if you were  
watching the movie in a  
theater.  
THEATER  
OFF  
(You cannot adjust the image  
quality.) Go to step 7.  
: Suitable when viewing a movie in  
a dim room.  
(You cannot adjust the image  
quality.) Go to step 7.  
CINEMA  
: Cancels 3D phonic (initial  
setting).  
• While 3D phonic is activated,  
displayed in the display window.  
is  
USER1/USER2: You can adjust the image quality.  
Go to step 3.  
NOTE  
3 Press  
to select an item  
you want to adjust.  
• 3D phonic is effective for both the speakers and  
headphones.  
• When noise is produced or sound is distorted,  
4 Press  
.
set  
"
3D PHONIC  
"
to "OFF".  
• You cannot operate some types of DVD AUDIO  
discs.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Adjusting Playback Level  
(DVD LEVEL)  
Enjoying Better Pictures  
(PROGRESSIVE)  
In the progressive mode, you can enjoy better  
pictures.  
The audio of a DVD VIDEO and DVD AUDIO may  
be recorded at a lower level (volume) than for  
other types of disc. You can adjust the DVD level.  
CAUTION  
• In order to enjoy pictures in the progressive mode,  
the following requirements should be met.  
• There must be component video input termi-  
nals on the TV set connected to the main unit.  
• The main unit and the TV set must be con-  
nected using a component video cord  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, the display  
(
page 15).  
toggles as follows in the display window.  
When the above requirements are not satisfied,  
leave the main unit in the Interlace mode. If the  
progressive mode is set, pictures may be dis-  
torted.  
: Sound level recorded in the  
DVD.  
: Enhances the sound level  
(initial setting).  
While the disc is played back or paused  
: Enhances the sound level to the  
highest level.  
Hold down  
.
• Each time you press  
toggles as follows.  
, the display  
• Select the level while listening to the  
sound played back.  
Interlace mode (initial setting)  
NOTE  
• DVD level is effective only for playback of a DVD.  
• Even if the DVD level is changed, the output  
level from the digital audio output terminal will not  
be changed.  
• This function does not affect recording sound.  
Progressive mode  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Playing Back the Bonus  
Group  
Browsable Still Pictures  
(B.S.P.)  
There are some DVD AUDIO discs with a special  
group, called "bonus group", recorded.  
There are some DVD AUDIO discs with still pic-  
tures recorded. Among the still pictures, there are  
pictures called B.S.P. (browsable still pictures).  
You can change these pictures as if turning over  
pages.  
Bonus indicator  
• This operation can be carried out when  
"BONUS" is lit in the display window on  
the main unit.  
B.S.P. indicator  
• This operation can be carried out when  
"B.S.P." is lit in the display window on the  
main unit.  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Press  
.
• Each time you press  
will be switched over.  
, the still picture  
2 Press  
repeatedly during  
playback to select a bonus group.  
You can also change the pictures by  
pressing  
.
• "KEY_ _ _ _" appears on the TV screen  
and in the display window on the main  
unit.  
Example: TV screen  
Selected page/  
Total number of  
pages  
3 Press the number buttons to enter  
a pin code (4 digits).  
• The method of getting a pin code is  
different depending on the disc.  
Selected page  
(still picture)  
4 Press  
.
• When a correct pin code is entered,  
"BONUS" disappears and the playback  
of the bonus group starts.  
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
• If an incorrect pin code is entered, try  
entering a correct pin code again.  
NOTE  
• You can operate this function on the menu bar  
(
page 34).  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Example: For DVD VIDEO  
Playing Back the Disc in the  
Desired Order (Program  
Playback)  
TV screen  
Program  
screen  
You can program a maximum of 99 chapters or  
tracks. You can program the same chapter or track  
more than once.  
While a disc is stopped  
3 Press the number buttons (  
-
or  
) to program chapters/  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
tracks.  
Display for DVD VIDEO  
• Select a title number, and then select a  
chapter number.  
Title number Chapter number  
2 Press  
to select "PROGRAM".  
Display for DVD VIDEO  
Program number  
Program indicator  
Display for DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
• Select a group number, and then select a  
track number.  
Display for DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
DVD, MP3 or WMA  
DVD, MP3 or WMA  
Track number  
Group number  
Program indicator  
Program number  
Display for CD/VCD/SVCD  
Display for CD/VCD/SVCD  
• Select a track number.  
Track number  
CD or VCD  
"VCD" is displayed while  
VCD/SVCD is selected.  
Program indicator  
Program number  
Total time for  
program playback  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Example: For DVD VIDEO  
Random Playback  
TV screen  
1
5
You can listen to tracks or chapters in random  
order.  
While playback is stopped  
1 Press  
"RANDOM".  
repeatedly to select  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
page 16).  
(
Example: For CD  
• Before selecting a bonus group of a DVD  
AUDIO, cancel the "BONUS" display as  
explained in "Playing back the Bonus  
Group" on page 30.  
• When you try to enter more than 99 chap-  
ters or tracks, "MEMORY FULL" appears.  
Random indicator  
• "RANDOM" appears in the TV screen.  
4 Press  
.
2 Press  
.
Confirming programmed content  
NOTE  
While playback is stopped, press  
• Pressing  
back to the previous track.  
repeatedly does not return play-  
or  
repeatedly.  
• During this operation, you can add a  
track as the last in the program, or erase  
• Each track is played back once.  
the last track. (  
step 3)  
Canceling random playback  
Canceling program playback  
While playback is stopped, press  
While playback is stopped, press  
repeatedly to display an item  
repeatedly to display an item  
other than "RANDOM".  
other than "PROGRAM".  
• This operation does not erase the pro-  
grammed content.  
NOTE  
• Ejecting the disc or turning off the main unit also  
cancels random playback.  
Erasing the whole program  
While playback is stopped, hold down  
.
NOTE  
• Ejecting the disc or turning off the main unit also  
erases the programmed content. This operation  
also cancels program playback.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Repeat Playback  
Refer to page 37 for repeat playback of MP3/WMA  
and JPEG files.  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
will be changed.  
, the repeat type  
For DVD VIDEO  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
Repeat types  
TV screen  
CHAP*  
TITLE  
Repeats the  
current chapter  
REPEAT  
CHAPTER*  
Repeats the  
current title  
REPEAT  
TITLE  
ALL  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
OFF  
For DVD AUDIO  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Repeats the  
current track  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
TRACK*  
GROUP  
OFF  
Repeats the  
current group  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
GROUP  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
For CD/VCD/SVCD  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Repeats the  
current track  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
TRACK*  
ALL  
Repeats all  
tracks  
REPEAT  
ALL  
ALL  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
OFF  
* "STEP" is displayed during program playback or  
random playback.  
NOTE  
• For a VCD and SVCD, the operation can be carried  
out during playback without the PBC function  
(
page 23).  
• You can also operate this function on the menu  
bar ( page 34).  
• For details on A-B repeat (repeat playback of a  
designated part), refer to page 35.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Bar and Menu Bar  
Changes time information displayed in  
the display window on the main unit and  
the status bar. Each time  
is  
Time display  
selection  
pressed, the display will be changed.  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
TOTAL : Elapsed playing time of current title/  
group  
Remote control  
mode selector  
T.REM : Remaining time of current title/group  
TIME : Elapsed playing time of current  
chapter/track  
REM  
:
Remaining time of current chapter/track  
CD/VCD/SVCD  
TIME : Elapsed playing time of current track  
REM : Remaining time of current track  
TOTAL : Elapsed playing time of disc  
T.REM : Remaining time of disc  
page 33  
Number buttons  
Repeat mode  
Time search  
page 35  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
Selects a chapter/track. Press the  
number buttons to enter the chapter/  
track number and press  
Examples:  
.
Chapter search/  
Track search  
You can display the status bar and menu bar on  
the TV screen, and can control discs with the bars.  
5:  
24:  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/VCD/SVCD  
CAUTION  
page 26  
Audio  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/SVCD  
page 27  
Subtitle  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
Using the Status Bar and  
Menu Bar  
page 27  
View angle  
Page switch  
DVD AUDIO  
Switches the still pictures (B.S.P.)  
recorded on a DVD AUDIO disc.  
While a disc is being played back  
page 30  
1 Press  
twice.  
Information displayed on the status bar  
Status bar  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO (the example below is  
for a DVD VIDEO)  
Menu bar  
• The above is an example for a DVD VIDEO.  
Time Playback status  
Transfer rate  
(only for DVD VIDEO)  
(DVD VIDEO)  
Current chapter number  
(DVD AUDIO)  
(DVD VIDEO)  
2 Press  
to select an item you  
Current title number  
(DVD AUDIO)  
Current track number  
want to operate.  
Current group number  
3 Press  
.
VCD/SVCD/CD (the example below is for a CD)  
You can set the selected function. For the  
setting items, refer to the following "Function  
list".  
Time Playback status  
Playback mode  
• The currently active function shows blue.  
Current track number  
NOTE  
To cancel the menu bar, press  
.
• The playback status mark has the same meaning of  
Function list  
the mark on the on-screen guide (  
page 23).  
Press  
to select, and press  
to  
determine unless otherwise noted.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Status Bar and Menu Bar  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 34.  
Playing Back the Designated  
Part Repeatedly  
(A-B Repeat Playback)  
Designate the Time  
(Time Search)  
While a disc is being played back  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
1 Press  
twice.  
• The menu bar (  
page 34) appears.  
2 Press  
3 Press  
to select  
.
2 Press  
twice.  
• The menu bar appears (  
page 34).  
.
4 Press  
to select  
3 Press  
4 Press  
5 Enter the time using the number  
to select  
.
.
A
B
.
5 Press  
at the starting point of  
the part to be repeated (designat-  
ing A point).  
buttons ( ).  
-
,
Example: When you want to play back a  
disc from the position of (0 hour)  
23 minutes 45 seconds, press  
the buttons in the order:  
• The icon on the menu bar will be  
.
6 Press  
at the end of the part to  
be repeated (designating B point).  
• The icon on the menu bar will be  
.
"
A-B" appears in the display window on  
You can skip entering "minutes" and  
"seconds".  
the main unit and the part between A and B  
points is played back repeatedly.  
• If you enter wrong numbers, press  
to  
Canceling A-B repeat playback  
delete the numbers, and then enter the  
numbers again.  
To cancel A-B repeat playback:  
• Press  
.
6 Press  
.
• Select  
(Select  
and press  
.)  
twice.  
To delete the menu bar, press  
.
NOTE  
NOTE  
• You may not be able to operate this function  
depending on the disc.  
• You can operate a VCD and SVCD while the disc is  
played back with PBC off.  
• This function does not work during program play-  
back or random playback.  
• For a CD, this operation can always be carried  
out. For a VCD or SVCD, the operation can be  
carried out when the disc is stopped or during  
playback without the PBC function.  
• A-B repeat playback is possible only within the  
same title or track. A-B repeat playback cannot  
be carried out during PBC playback, program  
playback, random playback and repeat playback.  
• Time search for a DVD VIDEO is from the  
beginning of the title, for a DVD AUDIO is from  
the beginning of the track being played back.  
Time search for a VCD, SVCD and a CD is as  
follows:  
• When the disc is stopped, time search is from  
the beginning of the disc.  
• When the disc is being played back, time search  
is within the track currently being played back.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG Discs  
Playback  
Display of an MP3/WMA disc is described here as  
an example.  
For a JPEG disc, read "track" as "file".  
Remote control  
mode selector  
NOTE  
• When playing back a disc containing both MP3/  
WMA and JPEG files, set one of them to be played  
(
page 38).  
1 Insert a disc.  
Example: TV screen  
This indicator lights up  
during repeat playback  
This indicator lights up  
during program playback  
(
page 37).  
Elapsed playing time of  
the selected track  
(only for MP3/WMA).  
(
page 31).  
Group list  
Number buttons  
Tag information of the  
selected track  
(only for MP3s/WMAs)  
Track list (Tracks con-  
tained in the selected  
group)  
Example: Display window  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Group number  
Track number  
"WMA" is displayed when a WMA disc  
is loaded, and "JPG" is displayed when  
a JPEG disc is loaded.  
2 Press  
3 Press  
to select a group.  
to move to the track list.  
• Pressing  
returns to the group list.  
(Continued on next page)  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG Discs  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 36.  
4 Press  
5 Press  
to select a track.  
.
Repeat Playback  
or  
Example: Display during playback  
While a disc is being played back  
Group number  
Track number  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
changed.  
, the repeat type is  
Display in the  
display window on  
the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Elapsed playing time  
(This indicator is not displayed  
while a JPEG is loaded.)  
• At first, a track title (file name) is scrolled.  
Repeats the  
current track  
(only for MP3/  
WMA)  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
REPEAT*  
TRACK  
• When an MP3 or WMA is loaded, tag information  
(title/artist/album) is scrolled followed by a track  
title.  
• Only alphanumerical one-byte characters are  
displayed properly as a track title or tag informa-  
tion.  
Repeats the  
current group  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
GROUP  
ALL  
Repeats the  
entire disc  
REPEAT  
ALL  
REPEAT ALL  
No display  
Cancels repeat  
playback  
REPEAT  
OFF  
NOTE  
* "STEP" is displayed during program playback and  
random playback.  
• You can also use  
You can also use the number buttons in step 4. In  
this case, steps 3 and 5 are not needed. Refer to  
and  
in step 2.  
NOTE  
“Using the number buttons” (  
page 16).  
• The repeat types can also be changed while the  
disc is stopped.  
• The repeat playback is automatically canceled if  
there is a file that cannot be played back  
• You can also use or  
in step 4. In this  
case, step 3 is not needed.  
(
page 4).  
Slide-show playback  
• For a JPEG disc, when you press  
in step  
5, files are continuously played back from the  
selected file (slide-show playback). When you  
press  
, only a selected file is played back.  
• A file is displayed for approximately 3 seconds  
in a slide-show playback.  
• After all files are played back, the playback is  
automatically stopped.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preferences  
LANGUAGE  
NOTE  
• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc,  
the optimum language set for the disc appears.  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to the  
"Language Codes" (  
page 41).  
Number buttons  
Items  
Contents  
MENU LANGUAGE Select the language for the DVD VIDEO menu.  
AUDIO LANGUAGE Select the audio language for the DVD VIDEO.  
Select the subtitle language for the DVD  
VIDEO.  
SUBTITLE  
ON SCREEN  
LANGUAGE  
Select the language displayed on the preference  
screens.  
You can change the initial settings of this product  
according to the environment the product is used  
in.  
PICTURE  
Items  
Contents (  
: initial setting)  
CAUTION  
MONITOR Select a display method suitable for your TV.  
TYPE  
16 : 9 /16 : 9 MULTI (wide TV):  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your wide  
TV is fixed to 16:9 (when playing back a DVD  
VIDEO recorded at 4:3, this product automatically  
adjusts the screen width of the output signal).  
NOTE  
• The top and bottom of the preference screen may  
not be displayed on a wide TV. Adjust the picture  
size on the TV.  
4 : 3 LB/4 : 3 MULTI LB (letter box):  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your TV is  
conventional 4:3. While viewing a wide screen  
picture, the black bars appear on the top and  
bottom of the screen.  
Basic Operations  
This section explains basic operation for changing  
various settings.  
While a disc is stopped or no disc is loaded  
(while "NO DISC" is displayed)  
4 : 3 PS/4 : 3 MULTI PS (pan scan):  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your TV is  
conventional 4:3. While viewing a wide screen  
picture, the left and right edges of the picture will not  
be shown on the screen. (If the disc is not  
compatible with the pan scan, the picture will be  
displayed at the letter box ratio.)  
1 Press  
.
• "SETTING" appears in the display window  
on the main unit and the following screen  
appears on the TV.  
PICTURE Select an item suitable to the video source.  
SOURCE VIDEO:  
Select this item when you want to view a normal  
video.  
FILM:  
Select this item when you want to view a film or  
video recorded with the progressive scan method.  
AUTO:  
The video source type (a video or film) is  
automatically selected.  
• Proceed with operations by following the  
description on the TV screen.  
SCREEN Select the screen saver mode between  
/OFF  
ON  
SAVER  
(screen saver activates when there is no operation  
made for about 5 minutes since a still picture was  
last displayed).  
FILE  
TYPE  
If a disc includes an AUDIO file (MP3/WMA) and a  
still picture file (JPEG), select which file is played  
back. If you change this setting, open and close the  
disc tray, or momentarily turn off the main unit. (A  
disc either with audio files or still picture files can be  
played back regardless of this setting.)  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Preferences  
AUDIO  
OTHERS  
Items  
RESUME  
Contents (  
page 24)  
: initial setting)  
Items  
Contents (  
: initial setting)  
(
DIGITAL  
Select an output signal type from the  
following in accordance with the  
equipment connected to the digital audio  
output terminal (AV amplifier, etc.). (See the  
list below for the preference items and  
output signal.)  
AUDIO  
ON SCREEN Select whether you display guide icons on  
GUIDE  
OUTPUT  
the on-screen guide indicating status of a  
disc/main unit (For details on the guide  
icons, refer to page 23)  
AV COMPU  
LINK MODE  
When you want to control JVC TV by using  
this product, select a mode that matches  
the terminal from the following. (For more  
details, refer to "Using AV COMPU LINK"  
on page 51.)  
PCM ONLY:  
Equipment corresponding only to linear PCM.  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM:  
Dolby digital decoder or equipment having the  
same function.  
DVD1 :  
Connect to the video-3 input on the TV set.  
STREAM/PCM :  
DTS/Dolby digital decoder or equipment  
having the same function.  
DVD2:  
Connect to the video-1 input of the TV set.  
DOWN MIX  
Switch signal from the digital output  
DVD3:  
terminal of the DVD VIDEO according to  
the connected equipment. Select this when  
Digital Audio Output is set to "PCM ONLY".  
Connect to the video-2 input of the TV set.  
PARENTAL  
LOCK  
Set the parental lock function to cut off  
violent scenes or replace the scenes with  
others. (This is effective only for discs  
equipped with the parental lock function.)  
DOLBY SURROUND :  
A dolby pro logic decoder-built-in equipment.  
STEREO:  
An ordinary equipment.  
COUNTRY CODE (  
page 40)  
Select your country or area.  
SET LEVEL:  
The restriction is stricter as the number  
becomes smaller. "NONE" is no restriction.  
• When 3D phonic is activated, Down Mix  
does not work.  
D (Dynamic).  
RANGE  
To make adjustments for the difference  
between a high volume and a low volume  
PASSWORD (essential):  
Enter four-digit number as your password  
using the number buttons (1-9, 0) every time.  
(Enter "8888" if you forget your password.)  
The password is required at the time of  
playback.  
COMPRESSION when playing back with low volume (only  
for a DVD recorded with Dolby digital).  
:
AUTO  
D. range compression automatically works.  
ON:  
• If you enter a wrong password three times,  
"EXIT" will be automatically selected.  
D. range compression always works.  
List of relationships of DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT preference items and output  
signal  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT preference  
Playback disc  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM  
PCM ONLY  
48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits  
Linear PCM DVD VIDEO  
96 kHz linear PCM DVD VIDEO  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
48/96/192 kHz,  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
16/20/24 bits linear PCM DVD AUDIO  
44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,  
16/20/24 bits linear PCM DVD AUDIO  
DTS DVD VIDEO  
DTS bit stream  
DOLBY DIGITAL bit stream  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL DVD VIDEO/  
DVD AUDIO  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear  
PCM  
CD/VCD/SVCD  
DTS CD  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
DTS bit stream 44.1 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
MP3/WMA disc  
NOTE  
• For a DVD VIDEO without content protection set, there is a 20 bit or 24 bit output at the digital audio output terminal.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Country/Area Codes  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Language Codes  
Code Language  
Code Language  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DA  
DZ  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FI  
Afar  
MK  
ML  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NL  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Dutch  
NO  
OC  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
OM (Afan) Oromo  
OR  
PA  
PL  
PS  
PT  
QU  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Polish  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Corsican  
Czech  
Welsh  
Danish  
Bhutani  
RM Rhaeto-Romance  
RN  
RO  
RU  
Kirundi  
Rumanian  
Russian  
Greek  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Faroese  
Frisian  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
FJ  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
IE  
IK  
IN  
IS  
IW  
JI  
JW  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
SK  
SL  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SV  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Hindi  
Siswati  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swedish  
SW Swahili  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
TK  
TL  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
Tamil  
Telugu  
Tajik  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
Yiddish  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
Kirghiz  
Latin  
Lingala  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
TW Twi  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
VO  
WO Wolof  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
LV  
MG Malagasy  
MI  
Maori  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Discs/Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Cassette tape indicator  
(The cassette tape indicator lights up while the cas-  
sette tape is stopped. The cassette tape indicator  
flashes while the cassette tape is being played back.)  
Reverse mode  
Cassette tape playback  
direction ( : normal direc-  
tion/ : opposite direction)  
CAUTION  
• Before using a cassette tape, wind up any slack in  
the cassette tape. (  
page 52)  
• Do not use long cassette tapes such as C-120 or  
C-150. Long cassette tapes are thin and stretch  
easily, and may become tangled in the inner part  
of the main unit.  
• This product is compatible with playback of  
TYPE I cassette tapes. Playback of TYPE II or  
TYPE IV cassette tapes is not recommended,  
because this product does not meet the specifi-  
cations for these tapes. The main unit does not  
produce the proper sound from these cassette  
tape types.  
Operation  
2 Press  
repeatedly to select  
the reverse mode.  
Stop  
Press  
.
: For one return playback of both  
sides.  
Press  
• When a cassette tape is played back  
in the normal direction ( ), is  
or  
.
: For repeated playback of both sides  
(Playback continues until playback is  
stopped.)  
fast forward and is rewind.  
Fast forward/  
Rewind  
• When the cassette tape is played  
back in the opposite direction ( ),  
: For one-way playback of either side.  
is fast forward and  
rewind.  
• You can perform the same operation  
is  
3 Press  
.
• Playback starts.  
by pressing or  
.
• When the main unit is turned off, pressing  
automatically turns on the main unit.  
1 Insert a cassette tape.  
• Each time you press  
, the cassette tape  
playback direction changes. The initial play-  
back direction after you have inserted a cas-  
sette tape is always the normal direction.  
• The cassette tape playback direction indica-  
tor facing right is displayed during normal  
playback. The indicator facing left is dis-  
played during reverse playback.  
Insert a cassette tape  
with the side you want to  
listen to facing up.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Other Equipment/Recording Sound  
Listening to Other Equipment  
Adjusting the Sound Input  
Level from Other Equipment  
Adjusting the sound input level of the  
AUX  
1 Press  
.
2 Hold down  
until the input level  
appears.  
• Each time you hold down  
toggles as follows.  
, the display  
For ordinary use.  
(initial setting)  
For increasing the level.  
1 Press  
.
2 Start other equipment playback.  
• Refer to the operation manual for the con-  
nected equipment.  
3 Adjust the volume and make other  
necessary settings.  
• For adjusting the volume and making other  
necessary settings, refer to "Basic Opera-  
tions" (  
page 17).  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
Main unit  
Preventing recorded sound from  
being erased  
• Write protect tags are attached to a cassette  
tape for preventing the erasing of recorded  
sound. They enable you to avoid losing impor-  
tant recordings because once you snap off the  
write protect tags, you cannot record to the cas-  
sette tape or erase recorded material.  
• When you want to use the cassette tape for  
recording again, cover the tag holes with adhe-  
sive tape.  
Remote control  
Write protect  
tag for side A  
Write protect  
tag for side B  
1 Insert a cassette tape for record-  
ing.  
• Before inserting the cassette tape, wind the  
tape past the leader part of the cassette  
tape.  
Magnetic tape  
(recordable part)  
Leader tape (unrecordable part)  
2 Press  
mode.  
to select the reverse  
NOTE  
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
• The sound input level during recording is automati-  
cally adjusted.  
• When you record tracks from a disc, a 4-second  
blank is inserted between tracks in the recording.  
You can record tracks with no blank time.  
: For one-way recording on either  
side.  
: For one return recording on both  
sides.  
(
page 45)  
: Pressing  
automatically  
CAUTION  
starts one return recording on  
both sides.  
You can change the reverse mode during  
• It may be unlawful to record or playback  
copyright material without the consent of the  
copyright owner.  
recording.  
• Do not use long cassette tapes such as C-120 or  
C-150. Long cassette tapes are thin and stretch  
easily, and may become tangled in the inner part  
of the main unit.  
• Since this product is not compatible with TYPE II  
and TYPE IV cassette tapes, do not use these  
types of cassette tapes. This product does not  
meet the specifications for these tapes, so sound  
is not properly recorded to these types of cas-  
sette tapes. You cannot obtain proper playback  
sound.  
(Continued on next page)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 44.  
3
Select a sound source for recording.  
Recording the Second or  
Subsequent Track to the Last  
Track from a Disc  
Sound source  
Operation  
Press  
, and then press  
.
Disc  
(The disc is stopped.)  
(For a DVD VIDEO: while the disc is paused)  
Select the radio station whose broad-  
Radio  
For a CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD VIDEO  
Before proceeding to step 4, select the  
starting track/chapter number by  
broadcast  
cast you want to record (  
page 19).  
Sound from  
other  
equipment  
(AUX)  
Press  
and prepare playback on  
the other equipment (  
page 43).  
pressing  
or  
.
For a DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
Before proceeding to step 4, select the  
4 Press  
on the main unit.  
Example: Display while CD sound is recorded  
group number by pressing  
, and then select the track num-  
ber by pressing or  
or  
.
Program Recording from a  
Disc  
• When you record from a disc, all tracks are  
recorded to the cassette tape.  
• When you want to record sound from other  
equipment, start playback on the connected  
equipment.  
• When recording finishes, the color pattern of  
the display window and disc tray switches to  
the color pattern set in "MANUAL" to inform  
Before proceeding to step 4, program  
the tracks you want to record  
(
page 31).  
you that recording has finished (  
18).  
page  
Recording with No Blank Time  
between Tracks  
Quitting Recording  
Before proceeding to step 4, play back  
a disc, pause the playback, and then  
Press  
.
press  
of the first track.  
to return to the beginning  
Recording Only One Track  
from a Disc  
Erasing Recorded Sound  
from a Cassette Tape  
(Excluding DVD VIDEOs)  
Before proceeding to step 4, play back  
the track you want to record.  
Select the sound from other equip-  
ment (AUX) in step 3, and then press  
• Pressing  
in step 4 returns playback to  
.
the beginning of the track and only that track  
is recorded.  
• Do not play back any tracks on the  
connected equipment.  
NOTE  
• If the cassette tape reverses direction while a track  
is being recorded from a disc, this product starts  
recording that track again from the beginning onto  
the reverse side of the cassette tape. However, if  
12 or less seconds of that track were recorded onto  
the first side of the cassette tape, recording to the  
reverse side of the cassette tape starts from the  
beginning of the previous track.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Sound/Convenient Functions  
Set the clock beforehand (  
page 16).  
Using the Timers  
Sleep Timer  
When the specified time passes, the main unit  
automatically turns off.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
(in minutes) toggles as follows.  
, the time display  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Cancel (Sleep  
indicator disappears.)  
Example: Display while the sleep timer is set to  
60 minutes  
Sleep indicator  
Number buttons  
NOTE  
• When you set the sleep timer, the display window  
automatically dims.  
• Before the clock has been set (While "0:00" is  
flashing), when you press  
ADJUST!" appears.  
, "CLOCK  
Changing the sleep timer setting  
• Press  
repeatedly to select the time again.  
Confirming the sleep timer setting  
(remaining time)  
• With the sleep timer activated, press  
once.  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Using the Timers  
ONCE  
: The recording timer works  
once.  
Recording Timer  
EVERYDAY : The recording timer works  
every day.  
You can use the recording timer function to record  
FM/AM broadcasts or sound from other equipment  
to cassette tape.  
You can enter up to three timer settings in total for  
the recording timer and the playback timer  
7 Press  
8 Press  
.
or  
to select "REC  
(
page 48).  
TIMER".  
• "REC" stands for "Recording".  
NOTE  
• Timer settings remain unchanged until the timer is  
replaced by new setting.  
9 Press  
10 Press  
.
or  
sound source.  
to select a  
1 Prepare the sound source.  
Radio  
Preset the radio station whose  
broadcast you want to record.  
Example: To record an FM broadcast to a  
cassette tape  
(
page 20)  
Other  
equipment  
Follow the operation manual for the  
equipment.  
2 Insert a cassette tape. (  
42)  
page  
• When you want to record sound from other  
equipment, you cannot use the recording  
timer function to start playback on any  
equipment other than this product.  
3 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"TIMER1", "TIMER2" or "TIMER3".  
When you want to record an FM/AM radio  
broadcast  
Example: When "TIMER1" is selected  
• Press  
, and then press  
,
or  
the number buttons to select the preset  
number of the radio station whose broad-  
cast you want to record. Refer to "Using  
the number buttons" (  
page 16).  
Timer number  
11 Press  
.
4 Press  
5 Press  
.
• The settings appear in the display window.  
Confirm the settings.  
,
or  
to set the  
starting time and ending time.  
12 When the main unit is on, press  
to turn off the main unit.  
Example:To set the recording time from 6:30  
a.m. to 6:45 a.m.  
• While the recording timer is functioning, the  
volume is set to "0" and no sound is pro-  
duced from the speakers or headphones.  
• The recording timer is available only when  
the main unit is turned off.  
You can use the number buttons to set the  
recording time. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
• For setting the clock, refer to "Setting the  
Clock" ( page 16).  
page 16).  
NOTE  
• During operation, you can return to the previous  
Entering the "hour" →  
"minute" →  
Entering the  
step by pressing  
. You can quit the recording  
timer settings by pressing  
not stored.  
. The settings are  
6 Press  
or  
to select  
"ONCE" or "EVERYDAY".  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Convenient Functions  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 46.  
Playback Timer  
Canceling the recording timer  
In step 2 on page 47, select the timer number you  
want to cancel, and then press  
1 Prepare the sound source you  
want to play back.  
.
Even when you cancel the recording timer, the set-  
ting remains stored.  
Disc  
Make sure that a disc is loaded.  
page 21)  
(
Cassette  
tape  
Insert a cassette tape. (  
page 42)  
Activating the recording timer again  
Radio  
Preset the radio station whose broadcast  
you want to listen to. ( page 20)  
Follow the operation manual for the  
In step 2 on page 47, select the timer number you  
want to activate, and then press  
repeatedly  
Other  
until all of the setting procedure finishes. Then turn  
off the main unit.  
equipment equipment.  
NOTE  
2 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"TIMER1", "TIMER2" or "TIMER3".  
• When you want to activate two or three recording  
timers, leave a blank time of 2 or more minutes  
between the ending time of the first recording timer  
and the starting time of the second recording timer.  
If the blank time is less than 2 minutes, the second  
recording timer does not work.  
Example: When "TIMER2" is selected  
• When the power plug is disconnected or the  
power is cut, the recording timer settings may be  
lost. If the settings are lost, set the clock and  
recording timer again.  
Timer number  
3 Press  
4 Press  
.
,
or  
to set the  
starting time and ending time.  
Example: When you want to set the playback  
time from 7:00 a.m. to 7:30 a.m.  
You can use the number buttons to set the  
playback time. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
• For setting the clock, refer to "Setting the  
Clock" ( page 16).  
page 16).  
Entering the "hour" →  
"minute" →  
Entering the  
5 Press  
or  
to select  
"ONCE" or "EVERYDAY".  
ONCE  
: The playback timer works once.  
EVERYDAY : The playback timer works every  
day.  
6 Press  
7 Press  
"PLAY TIMER".  
.
or  
to select  
(Continued on next page)  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Using the Timers  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 46.  
8 Press  
.
10 Press  
11 Press  
.
9
Press  
or  
to select the  
or  
to adjust the  
sound source you want to play back.  
playback volume.  
Example: When you want to listen to an AM  
broadcast  
12 Press  
.
• The settings appear in the display window.  
13 When the main unit is turned on,  
press  
unit.  
to turn off the main  
• When you want to listen to sound from other  
equipment, you cannot use the playback  
timer function to start playback on any  
equipment other than this product.  
You cannot use the playback timer function  
together with program playback, repeat  
playback or random playback of a disc.  
• The playback timer is available only when  
the main unit is turned off.  
When you want to listen to an FM/AM radio  
broadcast  
NOTE  
• During operation, you can return to the previous  
• (With "FM" or "AM" selected) Press  
and then press or the num-  
ber buttons to select the preset number  
of the radio station whose broadcast you  
want to listen to ( page 20). Refer to  
,
step by pressing  
. You can quit the playback  
,
timer settings by pressing  
not stored.  
• When the playback timer starts, the volume  
gradually increases to the selected level.  
. The settings are  
"Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
Canceling the playback timer  
function  
When you want to play back a DVD VIDEO  
or DVD AUDIO  
In step 2 on page 48, select the timer number you  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
twice. Regardless of the displayed num-  
bers of group (G) and track (T), you can  
play back a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO  
only from the beginning of the disc.  
want to cancel, and then press  
Even when you cancel the playback timer, the set-  
ting remains stored.  
.
When you want to play back a CD, VCD or  
Activating the playback timer again  
In step 2 on page 48, select the timer number you  
SVCD  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
want to activate, and then press  
repeatedly  
twice, and then press  
,
or the  
until all of the setting procedure finishes. Then turn  
off the main unit.  
number buttons to select the number of a  
track (T) from which you want to start  
playback. Refer to "Using the number  
NOTE  
• When you want to activate two or three playback  
timers, leave a blank time of 2 or more minutes  
between the ending time of the first playback timer  
and the starting time of the second playback timer.  
If the blank time is less than 2 minutes, the second  
playback timer does not work.  
buttons" (  
number (G) is ignored.  
page 16). The group  
When you want to specify a track from  
which you want to start playback on an MP3  
or WMA  
• When the power plug is disconnected or the  
power is cut, the playback timer settings may be  
lost. If the settings are lost, set the clock and  
playback timer again.  
• When you operate the playback timer with a DVD  
VIDEO, DVD AUDIO or VCD, sound and video  
may not be played back automatically. A DVD  
VIDEO, DVD AUDIO or VCD may contain a disc  
menu that appears first when played back.  
Sound or video will not come out before you  
select the desired item to be played back on the  
disc menu.  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
press or the number buttons  
to select the group number (G) to be  
played back, press , and then press  
or the number buttons to  
,
,
,
select the track number (T) to be played  
back. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
page 16).  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Standby  
Disc Ejection Lock  
If no sound is produced for 3 minutes when the  
disc or cassette tape is selected as a sound  
source, the main unit automatically turns off.  
When the disc or cassette tape is selected  
as a sound source  
You can prohibit ejection of a disc.  
When the main unit is turned off  
While holding down , press  
the main unit.  
Press  
.
on  
"A. STANDBY" stands for "Auto Standby".  
Auto standby indicator  
Even if you press , "LOCKED" appears in the  
display window and the disc does not come out.  
In addition, when you press , while the main unit  
Auto standby performance  
When playback or recording finishes, auto standby  
starts the countdown (the "A. STANDBY" indicator  
flashes). When no operation is carried out within 3  
minutes, the main unit automatically turns off.  
When you start playback or recording within 3 min-  
utes, auto standby starts the countdown again  
after playback or recording finishes.  
When an operation other than playback and record-  
ing finishes and no operation is carried out within 3  
minutes, the main unit automatically turns off.  
"A. STANDBY OFF" indicator starts to flash 20  
seconds before the main unit is to turn off.  
is turned off, "LOCKED" appears in the display  
window and the main unit does not turn on.  
Canceling the disc ejection lock  
When the main unit is turned off  
Carry out the operation explained above once  
again.  
Canceling auto standby  
Press  
once again.  
NOTE  
• Leaving the volume at "0" is not the same as produc-  
ing no sound, and therefore does not start the auto  
standby function.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Using AV COMPU LINK  
The JVC AV COMPU LINK system allows you to  
enjoy video or audio with the simplest operation. If  
your JVC TV set supports the JVC AV COMPU  
LINK system, simply starting the main unit will  
automatically make all necessary settings on the  
TV to allow you to enjoy the playback.  
Operations  
You can enjoy sound or video simply by starting  
playback on the main unit. You do not have to  
select the input setting for the TV, or turn on the TV  
beforehand.  
Connection and Setting  
1 Turn on the main power to the TV.  
2 Insert a disc into the main unit.  
• Carefully read manuals of equipment to be  
connected.  
3 Press  
on the main unit.  
Audio cord with  
monaural mini-  
The following operation is performed auto-  
matically.  
plugs  
AV COMPU  
LINK -II or -III  
AV  
(not supplied)  
COMPU LINK  
• The TV set will be turned on.  
• TV input will be switched to external input  
(Video 1, 2 or 3) of the main unit.  
When you turn off the main unit, power to the  
TV is not turned off.  
JVC-made TV set  
Main unit  
Set the main unit's AV COMPU LINK MODE  
setting ( page 39) as follows.  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-1 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 2  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-2 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 3  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-3 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 1  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Convenient Functions/Reference  
Handling Discs/Cassette Tapes  
Handling discs  
Cleaning the main unit cabinet  
• Do not put adhesive tape or stickers, or write on  
a disc.  
• Do not bend a disc.  
• Be sure not to use heart/flower shaped discs or  
other irregularly shaped discs. The use of such  
discs damages the main unit.  
• Gently dust the cabinet surface with a soft dry  
cloth. When the cabinet is very dirty, dampen the  
cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water,  
wring out the cloth well, and then wipe the cabi-  
net with the dampened cloth followed by a soft  
dry cloth.  
• Do not wipe the cabinet with thinners or ben-  
zenes. Wiping it with these agents may cause  
discoloration of the cabinet or removal of the  
paint. Do not spray insecticides or other highly  
volatile agents onto the cabinet. Do not leave  
pieces of rubber or plastic on the cabinet for a  
long period.  
Cleaning discs  
Signal surface  
Wipe a disc from the  
center outward with a  
soft cloth.  
Scratches concentrated  
on a certain part cause  
sound dropout.  
• Be sure not to use thinners, benzenes, cleaners  
for analog records, or other chemical agents.  
Handling cassette tapes  
• A slack tape may become  
caught in the inner part of  
the main unit and dam-  
age the main unit.  
Before using a cas-  
sette tape, wind up  
any slack in the cas-  
sette tape as shown  
on the right. Do not pull out the tape  
or touch the tape's surface.  
Cleaning the tape deck head  
• Clean the head, pinch rollers and capstans  
approximately every 10 hours of playback time  
before the volume falls or sound quality  
deteriorates  
Cotton-tipped  
swab moistened  
with alcohol  
Capstans  
Pinch roller  
Head  
Pinch roller  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Reference  
Disc Messages  
Disc message  
Meaning  
Possible solution  
Replace the disc.  
You are trying to play back an unplayable disc or  
a disc that has many scratches.  
CANNOT PLAY  
NO DISC  
No disc is loaded.  
NO AUDIO  
The disc may be an illegally copied disc.  
You cannot listen to the disc.  
You are playing back a multi-channel track for  
which down-mix is prohibited.  
LR ONLY  
This is normal operation.  
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
page  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Possible solution  
Improper connection.  
Connect all cords properly.  
11-15  
8
No sound/video is  
produced.  
Headphones are connected.  
Disconnect the headphone plug.  
The clock display is  
flashing.  
A power failure occured or the  
power plug was disconnected.  
Reset the clock.  
16  
21  
Place the disc on the disc tray with  
the letter-printed surface facing up.  
The disc is upside down.  
Disc playback does not  
start.  
Leave the main unit turned on, wait  
for approximately 1 or 2 hours, and  
then operate the main unit.  
Moisture has condensed on the  
lens.  
3
A certain point cannot be  
played back properly.  
The disc is scratched or dirty.  
The head or capstans are dirty.  
Clean or replace the disc.  
Clean the head or capstans.  
Cancel the write-protection.  
Connect an antenna.  
52  
52  
The volume of cassette  
tape playback is low.  
You cannot record a  
cassette tape.  
The cassette tape is write-  
protected.  
44  
A radio broadcast cannot  
be received.  
No antenna is connected.  
11, 12  
The main unit is located close to a  
TV, computer, or other electric  
appliance.  
A whirring noise is  
produced.  
Place the main unit away from a TV,  
computer, or other electric appliance.  
3
You cannot set the timer. You did not set the clock.  
The timer does not work. The main unit is turned on.  
Set the clock.  
16  
After setting the timer, turn off the  
main unit.  
47, 49  
You cannot operate the  
remote control.  
The remote control batteries are  
running low.  
Replace the batteries with new  
batteries.  
9
You cannot operate the  
main unit with the number The remote control mode selector Set the remote control mode selector  
16  
buttons on the remote  
control.  
on the remote control is set to TV. to AUDIO.  
When you turn on the  
main unit, a noise comes The internal cooling fan produces The noise is not a malfunction. This is  
13, 17  
out from the rear of the  
main unit.  
the noise as it rotates.  
to prevent excessive heat.  
If this product does not function properly even after you have implemented the possible  
solutions given above  
Many functions of this product are implemented by microcomputers. If malfunction is caused by  
thunder or static electricity, or the main unit does not function properly even when you press a  
button, disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet, wait for a while, and then connect this  
product again. Then reset the clock.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
DVD receiver (CA-UXQD9S)  
Amplifier  
General  
Output power 20 W + 20 W at 4  
(10% THD)  
Input terminals  
Power requirement AC 230 V , 50/60 Hz  
Power consumption 70 W (at operation)  
1.3 W (on standby)  
<Analog> AUX×1,  
Dimensions 165 mm (W) × 200 mm (H)  
× 355 mm (D)  
Mass (approx.) 4.6 kg  
500 mV/47 k  
:LEVEL1  
:LEVEL2  
250 mV/47 k  
Output terminals  
<Analog> Speaker×1, 20 W/4  
Impedance 4 - 16  
Headphone (×1), 25 mW/32  
Impedance 16 - 1 k  
Speaker (SP-UXQD9S)  
System 3-way bass reflex type,  
Magnetically shielded type  
Speakers Woofer: 10 cm × 1  
Midrange: 4 cm × 1  
<Digital> DVD/CD optical input × 1  
-23 dBm to -15 dBm  
(Optical square terminal)  
Tweeter: 1.5 cm × 1  
Powerhandling 20 W  
capacity  
<Other> AV COMPU LINK × 2 ( 3.5)  
φ
Tuner  
Impedance 4  
Frequency range 55 Hz - 40 kHz  
Sound pressure 85 dB/W•m  
level  
Dimensions 140 mm (W) × 231 mm (H)  
× 204.5 mm (D)  
Mass (approx.) 2.2 kg  
(1 unit)  
Frequency FM:87.50 MHz - 108.00 MHz  
AM:531 kHz - 1 710 kHz  
(9 kHz spacing)  
530 kHz - 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz spacing)  
DVD player  
Micro component system  
(UX-QD9S)  
Playable discs DVD VIDEO, DVD AUDIO,  
CD, VCD, SVCD, CD-R/CD-  
RW (CD, VCD, SVCD, MP3/  
WMA/JPEG format), DVD-R/  
DVD-RW (video format)  
General  
Dimensions 445 mm (W) × 231 mm (H)  
× 355 mm (D)  
Cassette deck  
Mass (approx.) 9.0 kg  
Frequency response  
Normal (type I) 60 Hz - 14 000 Hz  
Wow and flutter 0.15% (WRMS)  
• U.S. and foreign patents licensed from Dolby  
Laboratories.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EN, CS  
c
1004SKMMODJEM  
2004 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM  
微型组合音响  
UX-QD9S  
Consists of CA-UXQD9S and SP-UXQD9S  
CA-UXQD9S SP-UXQD9S 组成  
For hiding the demonstration  
display, refer to page 15.  
有关隐藏演示显示的详情,请参阅  
15 页。  
INSTRUCTIONS  
使用说明书  
LVT1220-004A  
[UN]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Warnings, Cautions and Others  
/
警告,注意及其他须知事项  
CAUTION  
注意  
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:  
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.  
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.  
为了减少触电、火灾等危险:  
1. 请勿擅自卸下螺丝钉、盖子或机壳。  
2. 请勿让本机受雨淋或置于潮湿环境中。  
CAUTION — F button!  
注意F 开关!  
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off  
completely.  
想要完全关闭电源,须将电源插头从插座上拔下。  
F 键处于何种位置,主电路仍旧没有关闭。  
电源开关可用遥控器进行控制。  
The F button in any position does not disconnect the  
mains line.  
The power can be remote controlled.  
CAUTION  
注意  
切勿堵塞通风口或通风孔。  
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a  
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to  
get out.)  
(如果通风口或通风孔被报纸或布等物堵塞,热量将无  
法散出)  
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems  
must be considered and local rules or laws governing  
the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.  
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping  
or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such  
as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
切勿在本系统上放置明火,如点燃的蜡烛。  
想要丢弃电池时,务必考虑环保问题以及严格遵守当地  
关于处理废旧电池相关的法律规定和条例。  
切勿让本机受雨淋、受潮湿、落上或溅上水滴,亦勿在  
本机上面放置盛满液体的容器,如花瓶。  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS / 镭射产品的重要说明  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
1. 一级镭射产品。  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no  
user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all  
servicing to qualified service personnel.  
2. 请勿打开顶盖板机内部没有用户可自行维修  
的部件;所有维修工作应由有资格的人员完成。  
3. 当内部锁定装置失效或者损坏后开盖板可能  
会产生可见或不可见的镭射辐射。 应避免受到镭射光  
束的直接照射。  
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when  
open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct  
exposure to beam.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL,  
PLACED INSIDE THE UNIT.  
4. 标签的复制标示意标签位于机内。  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION — Proper Ventilation  
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from  
damage, locate the apparatus as follows:  
正确的通风方法  
为了防止触电,火灾及避免损坏,  
按如下要求放置机器:  
Top/Front/Back/Sides:  
No obstructions should be placed in  
the areas shown by the dimensions  
below.  
/ / / 侧面: 在图中所示范围中,不应放置任何障  
碍物。  
Bottom:  
Place on the level surface. Maintain  
adequate air path for ventilation by  
placing on a stand with a height of  
10 cm or more.  
底部:  
放置在水平面上置在一个10 cm  
或更高的台上以保留足够的通风道。  
此外,如图所示,尽可能保持最佳的空气循环。  
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation.  
Front view  
前视图  
Side view  
侧视图  
Main unit  
本机  
15cm  
1cm  
1cm  
15cm  
15cm  
Main unit  
本机  
15cm  
Wall or  
obstructions  
墙壁或障碍物  
Front  
前面  
10cm  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
marks refer to operation used frequently. You can quickly learn the general usage of this  
product by reading those parts only.  
Introduction  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
..............................................  
Notes on Operation ............................. 3  
19  
Suitable Locations for the Main Unit.................  
Condensation....................................................  
Cleaning the Main Unit .....................................  
Listener’s Etiquette ...........................................  
Playable Disc Types .........................................  
Disc Structure ...................................................  
Selecting the Color System ..............................  
3
3
3
3
4
5
6
Setting the AM Tuner Spacing...................19  
Selecting a Radio Station ..........................20  
Storing Radio Stations (Preset) .................20  
Tuning In to a Preset Radio Station...........20  
Listening to Discs  
Special Cautions.................................. 7  
Notes on Handling ............................................  
Supplied Accessories .......................................  
7
7
Basic Operations of the DVD Player ...21  
Playback ................................  
21  
Playing Back from a Position 10 Seconds  
Preparation  
Before (One Touch Replay)...................23  
Part Description................................... 8  
Stopping Playback................. 24  
Resuming Playback (RESUME) ................24  
Pausing Playback ......................................24  
Advancing Picture Frame by Frame ..........24  
Fast Reverse/Fast Forward  
Remote Control ................................... 9  
Inserting Batteries into the Remote  
Control................................................... 9  
Operating the TV Using the Remote  
Search...............................  
24  
Control...................................................10  
Slow Motion Playback................................25  
Skipping to the Beginning of  
Connections.........................................11  
Connecting the Antennas ..........................11  
Connecting the Speakers ..........................13  
Connecting Other Equipment ....................14  
Connecting with a TV.................................14  
When a Clearer Picture Is Desired ............15  
Connecting the Power Plug .......................15  
a Track...............................  
25  
Skipping to the Beginning of a Track with  
the Number Buttons...............................25  
Selecting a Track from the Menu Screen ..25  
Convenient Functions of the DVD  
Player ................................................26  
Selecting the Audio................  
26  
Basic Operations  
Selecting the Subtitle.................................27  
Selecting a View Angle..............................27  
Magnifying the Picture (ZOOM).................27  
Adjusting the Picture Quality (VFP) ...........28  
Creating Realistic Sound (3D PHONIC) ....28  
Adjusting Playback Level (DVD LEVEL)....29  
Enjoying Better Pictures  
Basic Operations .................................16  
Setting the Clock........................................16  
Turning On/Off the Main Unit.  
Adjusting the Volume.............  
Temporarily Turning Off the Sound  
(FADE MUTING) ...................................17  
Emphasizing Heavy Bass Sound  
17  
17  
(PROGRESSIVE) ..................................29  
Playing Back the Bonus Group..................30  
Browsable Still Pictures (B.S.P.)................30  
Playing Back the Disc in the Desired Order  
(Program Playback)...............................31  
Random Playback......................................32  
Repeat Playback........................................33  
(AHB PRO)............................................17  
Adjusting the Sound Quality ......................17  
Changing the Color Patterns for  
the Display Window and Disc Tray........18  
Status Bar and Menu Bar....................34  
Using the Status Bar and Menu Bar ..........34  
Playing Back the Designated Part  
Repeatedly (A-B Repeat Playback).......35  
Designate the Time (Time Search)............35  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG  
Reference  
Discs..................................................36  
Playback ....................................................36  
Repeat Playback........................................37  
Handling Discs/Cassette Tapes ..........52  
Disc Messages....................................53  
Troubleshooting...................................53  
Specifications ......................................54  
Preferences .........................................38  
Basic Operations .......................................38  
LANGUAGE...............................................38  
PICTURE...................................................38  
AUDIO .......................................................39  
OTHERS....................................................39  
Country/Area Codes............................40  
Language Codes .................................41  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
..............................................  
42  
Listening to Other Equipment  
Listening to Other Equipment..............43  
Adjusting the Sound Input Level from  
Other Equipment ...................................43  
Recording Sound  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
..............................................  
44  
Quitting Recording.....................................45  
Recording Only One Track from a Disc.....45  
Recording the Second or Subsequent  
Track to the Last Track from a Disc.......45  
Program Recording from a Disc ................45  
Recording with No Blank Time between  
Tracks....................................................45  
Erasing Recorded Sound from  
a Cassette Tape....................................45  
Convenient Functions  
Using the Timers .................................46  
Sleep Timer ...............................................46  
Recording Timer ........................................47  
Playback Timer..........................................48  
Auto Standby.......................................50  
Disc Ejection Lock ...............................50  
Using AV COMPU LINK ......................51  
Connection and Setting .............................51  
Operations .................................................51  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Introduction  
Notes on Operation  
Suitable Locations for the  
Main Unit  
Cleaning the Main Unit  
When the operation panel becomes dirty, dust it  
with a soft dry cloth. When the operation panel is  
very dirty, wipe it with a cloth dampened with a  
small amount of a neutral detergent, and then wipe  
it with a soft dry cloth.  
To minimize the need for servicing and maintain  
the high quality of this product, do not place the  
main unit in the following locations:  
• In a position subject to high humidity or consid-  
erable dust  
CAUTION  
• On an uneven or unstable surface  
• Near a heat source  
• Near a computer, fluorescent light or other elec-  
tric appliance  
• Do not wipe the operation panel with thinners, ben-  
zenes or other chemical agents. Do not spray  
insecticides onto the operation panel. These may  
cause discoloration and damage to the surface.  
• In a small room with insufficient ventilation  
• In a position exposed to direct sunlight  
• In a position exposed to excessive cold  
• In a position exposed to strong vibration  
• Near a TV, other amplifier, or tuner  
• Near a magnetic source  
Listener's Etiquette  
When using headphones, keep the volume at a  
moderate level so as not to over-stimulate your  
ears.  
CAUTION  
When enjoying sound from the speakers,  
adjust the volume to a suitable level to  
avoid disturbing your neighbors.  
• The operating temperature of this product is 5°C to  
35°C. Use in temperatures outside this range may  
cause a malfunction or damage the product.  
Even low-volume sound carries a long way,  
especially at night. Show consideration to  
your neighbors by closing windows or using  
headphones.  
Condensation  
Under the following conditions, you may not be  
able to operate this product properly due to con-  
densation formed on the lens of the main unit:  
• When you have just started an air conditioner to  
warm your room  
• When you have placed the main unit at an area  
with high humidity  
• When you have moved the main unit from a cold  
place to a warm place  
When condensation forms, leave the main unit  
turned on, wait for approximately 1 or 2 hours, and  
then operate the main unit.  
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP Lossless", and the double-D symbol are trade-  
marks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• "DTS" and "DTS 2.0+DIGITAL OUT" are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• On some DVD VIDEOs, DVD AUDIOs, VCDs  
or SVCDs, their actual operation may be dif-  
ferent from what is explained in this manual.  
This is due to the disc programming and disc  
structure, not a malfunction of this product.  
Playable Disc Types  
This product has been designed to play back the  
following discs:  
DVD VIDEO, DVD AUDIO, VCD, SVCD, CD  
This product can also play back the following  
discs:  
• Finalized DVD-R/RW discs recorded in the DVD  
VIDEO format.  
About CD-Rs/CD-RWs  
You can play back a CD-R/CD-RW only  
when the disc is finalized.  
• CD-R/RW discs recorded in the following for-  
mats  
- Music CDs (finalized discs)  
- VCDs  
- SVCDs  
- MP3/WMA/JPEG discs recorded in ISO 9660 (for  
details, refer to "About MP3/WMA/JPEG discs")  
However, some discs may not be played back  
because of their disc characteristics, recording  
conditions, or damage or stain on them.  
Only sounds can be played back from the following  
discs:  
You can play back a CD-R/CD-RW which  
has been recorded in the audio CD for-  
mat and a CD-R/CD-RW to which audio  
data (MP3/WMA) or a still picture data  
(JPEG) file is recorded.  
However, playback is impossible in some  
cases due to the disc characteristics,  
recording condition, scratches or dirt on  
the disc, or dirt or condensation on the  
lens.  
• Before using a CD-R/CD-RW, carefully  
read the cautions regarding the disc.  
• This product does not support playback  
or CD text display of sound files such as  
MP3s.  
To play back a CD-RW on this product,  
erase all tracks if the CD-RW was  
recorded in a format other than the audio  
CD format. Using the CD-RW without  
erasing all tracks may result in damage to  
the speakers or other parts caused by  
sudden loud volume.  
MIX-MODE CD  
CD-EXTRA  
CD-G  
CD TEXT  
Discs you can play:  
Region  
Code  
Number*  
Video  
Format  
Disc Type  
Mark (Logo)  
DVD  
VIDEO  
PAL/  
NTSC  
3/ALL  
DVD  
AUDIO  
PAL/  
NTSC  
VCD  
Discs that cannot be played back  
PAL/  
NTSC  
• The following discs cannot be played back:  
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (recorded in  
VR format), CD-ROM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo  
CD, SACD, etc.  
Playing back these discs will generate noise and  
damage the speakers.  
• Damaged discs and discs in an extraordinary  
shape (other than a disc of 12 cm or 8 cm in  
diameter) cannot be played back.  
SVCD  
CD  
CD-R  
• JVC do not guarantee the operation and sound  
quality of discs not authorized by CD-DA, which  
is a CD specification.  
CD-RW  
Before playback, confirm that the disc complies  
with this CD specification by checking the marks  
and reading notes printed on the package.  
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
* Note on Region Code  
DVD players and DVD VIDEOs have their own  
region code numbers. This product can only play  
back a DVD VIDEO recorded with the region  
code number and video format mentioned  
above.  
Examples:  
If a DVD VIDEO with an improper region code  
number is loaded, "REGION CODE ERROR!"  
appears on the TV screen and playback cannot  
start.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Notes on Operation  
About MP3/WMA/JPEG discs  
Disc Structure  
Playable MP3/WMA/JPEG discs and files  
• Discs recorded in the ISO 9660 format are play-  
able (except discs recorded in the "packet write"  
format (UDF format)).  
• Discs recorded in the multi-session format are  
also playable.  
• Files with an extension of ".mp3", ".wma", ".jpg"  
or ".jpeg" (extensions with uppercase and lower-  
case letters mixed are also acceptable) are play-  
able.  
DVD VIDEO  
A DVD VIDEO consists of "titles" and each title  
may be divided into "chapters".  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG discs and files  
• A disc may not be played back, or reading it may  
take a long time depending on its recording con-  
ditions or properties.  
• The time needed for reading varies with the num-  
ber of groups or tracks (files) recorded on the disc.  
• If a character other than single byte English  
characters is used in the file name of an MP3/  
WMA/JPEG file, the track/file name will not be  
displayed correctly.  
• The order of tracks/groups displayed on the  
MP3/WMA Control screen, and the order of files/  
groups displayed on the JPEG Control screen  
may be different from that of files/folders dis-  
played on PC's monitor screen.  
DVD AUDIO  
A DVD AUDIO consists of "groups" and each  
group may be divided into "tracks".  
Some discs include a "bonus group" that requires  
a password for playing (  
page 30).  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 1  
Track 2  
VCD/SVCD/CD  
VCD, SVCD and CD consist of "tracks".  
• In the case of MP3/WMA discs, since groups/  
tracks are played back in alphabetical order, an  
off-the-shelf MP3/WMA disc may be played back  
in an order different from that indicated on the  
label attached to the disc.  
In general, each track has its own track number.  
(On some discs, each track may also be further  
divided by indexes.)  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
• Playing back an MP3/WMA file including a still  
image may take a long time. The elapsed time is  
not displayed until playing back starts. If playing  
back starts, the elapsed time may not be dis-  
played correctly.  
• For an MP3/WMA file, a disc with a sampling fre-  
quency of 44.1 kHz and transmission rate of 128  
kbps is recommended.  
MP3/WMA [JPEG] discs  
On an MP3/WMA [JPEG] disc, each still picture  
(material) is recorded as a track [file]. Tracks  
[Files] are usually grouped into a folder. Folders  
can also include other folders, creating hierarchical  
folder layers.  
This unit simplifies the hierarchical construction of  
a disc and manages folders by "groups".  
Up to 99 groups  
• This product is not compatible with MP3i or  
MP3PRO.  
• This product can play back a baseline JPEG file,  
excluding monochromatic JPEG files.  
• This product can play back JPEG data taken with a  
digital camera conforming to the DCF (Design  
Rule for Camera File System) standard (when a  
function is applied such as the automatic rotation  
function of a digital camera, data goes beyond the  
DCF standard, so the image may not be dis-  
played).  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Track 1 Track 2  
Group 3 Group 4 Group 5  
[File 1]  
[File 2]  
Up to 150 files  
• If data has been processed, edited and restored  
with PC image editing software, the data may  
not be displayed.  
This product can recognize up to 1 000 tracks  
[files] in a disc. Also, the product can recognize up  
to 150 tracks [files] per group and up to 99 groups  
in a disc. Since the unit ignores the tracks [files]  
whose numbers are exceeding 150 and the groups  
whose numbers are exceeding 99, they cannot be  
played back.  
• If there is any type of files other than MP3/WMA  
[JPEG] files in a disc, those tracks [files] are also  
counted in the total file number.  
• This product cannot play back animations such  
as MOTION JPEG, or still pictures (TIFF etc.)  
other than JPEG, and image data with sound.  
• The resolution of 640 x 480 pixels is recom-  
mended for JPEG files. If a file has been  
recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480  
pixels, display may take a long time. An image  
with a resolution of more than 8 192 x 7 680 pix-  
els cannot be displayed.  
• Files recorded on DVD-R/RW discs cannot be  
played back.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Color System  
This product is compatible with PAL and NTSC  
color systems.  
In standby mode, select PAL or NTSC to match  
your TV.  
If the VIDEO OUT SELECT switch is switched  
over when the power is on, turn off the power, and  
then turn it on again.  
• Before playing back a disc, it is also required to  
select the correct MONITOR TYPE in the  
PICTURE menu according to the aspect ratio of  
your TV (  
page 38).  
NOTE  
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set  
to "PAL", you can watch the playback pictures (the  
disc will be reproduced using "PAL 60" format), but  
the TV screen may rolls over upward and down-  
ward rapidly.  
NOTE  
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to  
"NTSC", you can watch the playback pictures, but  
the following symptoms may occur:  
• The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and  
be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.  
• The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from  
the original aspect ratio.  
• The picture movement is not smooth.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Special Cautions  
Avoid high temperatures  
Notes on Handling  
Do not expose the system to direct sunlight and do  
not place it near a heating equipment.  
Important cautions  
When you are away  
Installation of the system  
When away on travel or for other reasons for an  
extended period of time, disconnect the power  
cord plug from the wall outlet.  
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too  
hot nor too cold; between 5°C and 35°C.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the system  
and the TV.  
• Do not use the system in a place subject to  
vibration.  
Do not block the vents  
Blocking the vents may damage the system.  
Care of the cabinet  
When cleaning the system, use a soft cloth and fol-  
low the relevant instructions on the use of chemi-  
cally-coated cloths. Do not use benzene, thinner or  
other organic solvents including disinfectants.  
These may cause deformation or discoloring.  
Power cord  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands!  
• A small amount of power is always consumed  
while the power cord is connected to the wall  
outlet.  
• When unplugging the power cord from the wall  
outlet, always pull on the plug, not the power  
cord.  
If water gets inside the system  
Turn the system off and disconnect the power cord  
plug from the wall outlet, then call the store where  
you made your purchase. Using the system in this  
condition may cause fire or electrical shock.  
To prevent malfunctions of the system  
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If  
anything goes wrong, unplug the power cord and  
consult your dealer.  
When condensation or water drops adhere  
to the lens  
• Do not insert any metallic object into the system.  
• Do not use any non-standard shape disc (like a  
heart, flower or credit card, etc.) available on the  
market, because it may damage the system.  
• Do not use a disc with tape, stickers, or paste on  
it, because it may damage the system.  
In any of the following cases, condensation or  
water drops may adhere to the lens to prevent the  
system from working properly:  
• Immediately after roomheating starts  
• When the system is installed in a steamy or  
damp space  
• When the system is suddenly moved from a cold  
place to a warm space  
Label sticker  
In any of these cases, leave the system turned on  
for 1 or 2 hours before use.  
Sticker  
Supplied Accessories  
Paste  
Check to be sure you have all of the supplied  
accessories.  
The number in parentheses is the quantity of the  
pieces supplied. If anything is missing, contact  
your dealer immediately.  
Note about copyright laws  
Check the copyright laws in your country before  
recording from CDs. Recording of copyrighted  
material may infringe copyright laws.  
Remote control (1)  
Batteries (2)  
Safety precautions  
FM antenna (1)  
AM loop antenna (1)  
Video cord (1)  
Avoid moisture, water and dust  
Do not place the system in moist or dusty places.  
AC plug adaptor (1)  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights  
owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is  
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introcution/Preparation  
The numbers refer to the pages in which the parts are explained.  
Part Description  
18  
20  
21  
22  
17  
28  
42, 44  
30  
46-49 17  
50  
31-33  
21  
20  
42  
43  
Cassette holder: 42  
PUSH-OPEN  
17  
44  
28  
15, 18  
21  
17  
Remote control sensor: 9  
*
25, 30, 37, 45 24, 42  
Disc tray: 21  
* This terminal is for connecting a pair of headphones equipped with a stereo mini plug (not supplied). While  
the headphones are connected, the speakers do not produce any sound.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Preparation  
The numbers refer to the pages in which the parts are explained.  
Remote Control  
Inserting Batteries into the  
Remote Control  
17  
28  
17  
17  
10  
10  
20  
17  
18  
43  
42  
18  
21  
24  
10  
17  
10  
10, 16  
24, 42  
24, 42,  
47-49  
24, 25, 42  
R6P (SUM-3) /AA (15F)  
type dry-cell batteries (2)  
24, 42  
,
47-49  
25, 30,  
37, 45  
25  
25  
22, 25-28,  
30  
22, 25-28,  
30  
34  
50  
38  
46  
16, 47  
16  
23  
20, 47-49  
16, 20, 25,  
31, 35  
32  
42, 44  
33  
20, 31  
CAUTION  
• Do not use a used battery and a new battery  
together.  
• Do not use different types of batteries at the  
17  
17  
same time.  
27  
26  
27  
27  
Take out the batteries if the remote control is not  
to be used for a long time. Otherwise it may  
cause a leakage.  
23  
28, 29  
30  
29  
Remote control operation  
• When operating the remote control, point it at  
the front panel of the main unit.  
Opening the cover  
• The effective distance between the remote con-  
trol and the remote control sensor on the main  
unit is approximately 5 m maximum.  
• When the effective distance decreases, replace  
the batteries.  
• Do not drop the remote control or subject it to  
excessive shock.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0).  
This page is for when operating your TV using  
the remote control of this product.  
Examples:  
For a Hitachi TV: Press 1, then 0.  
For a Toshiba TV: Press 0, then 8.  
If there are two or more manufacturer's codes, try  
them in turn and select the one that causes the  
product to work properly.  
Operating the TV Using the  
Remote Control  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code  
01  
Manufacturer  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Code  
12  
Hitachi  
10  
13  
06  
07  
08  
09  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
02  
Sharp  
03  
Sony  
04, 11  
14  
Toshiba  
Zenith  
RCA  
05  
5 Release  
.
NOTE  
• The manufacturer's codes may be changed without  
notice. You may not be able to operate a TV  
produced by the manufacturer shown above.  
Number buttons  
For TV operation  
Operate the remote control by pointing it towards  
the TV.  
Turn on/off the power.  
Change channels.  
Setting the manufacturer's code  
1 Slide the remote control mode  
selector to the TV side.  
Adjust volume.  
2 Hold down  
.
-
/
/
Select channels.  
NOTE  
*1  
• Hold down  
until step 4 is completed.  
Change between the previously  
selected channel and the cur-  
rent channel.  
3 Press  
and release.  
Change between TV and video  
input.  
*1 Make sure to slide the remote control mode selector  
to the TV side in advance.  
NOTE  
• When the batteries are replaced, perform the  
manufacturer's code setting again.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
Connections  
Connecting the Antennas  
When radio reception with the supplied AM  
loop antenna is poor  
Connecting the AM antenna  
Vinyl-covered wire: 3 - 5 m  
(not supplied)  
1 Set up the AM antenna (supplied).  
Insert the tab into  
the slot.  
Twist together vinyl-  
covered wire and the AM  
loop antenna cord.  
Stretch out the vinyl-  
covered wire horizontally,  
preferably in a high place  
such as above a window  
or outdoors.  
Connect the AM loop  
antenna cord to the main  
unit together with the  
vinyl-covered wire.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
Main unit (side view)  
Main unit (rear view)  
Main unit (rear view)  
Connecting the antenna  
cord  
When insulation  
covers the tips of  
the antenna cord,  
twist and pull off  
the insulation.  
Connect the ends of  
the antenna cord as  
shown above.  
3 Turn the AM loop antenna to find  
the best position for radio  
reception.  
Place the AM loop antenna as far  
from the main unit as possible.  
• Do not place the AM loop antenna on a  
metallic table or close to a TV, computer, or  
other electric appliances. Doing so may  
affect radio reception.  
When positioning the antennas, find the best position for reception while listening to an actual radio program  
(refer to "Listening to Radio Broadcasts" (  
page 19)).  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When radio reception with the supplied FM  
antenna is poor, or when using a communal  
antenna  
Connecting the FM antenna  
Main unit (rear view)  
Main unit (side view)  
FM antenna  
(supplied)  
Main unit  
(rear view)  
Main unit (side view)  
Communal  
antenna terminal  
Antenna cord  
(not supplied)  
Stretch out the FM antenna to the best position for  
radio reception, and then fix it with adhesive tape.  
or  
Outdoor FM antenna  
(not supplied)  
Coaxial cable  
(not supplied)  
When using an antenna other than those  
supplied with this product, refer to the operation  
manuals for the antenna for details of  
connection.  
When positioning the antennas, find the best position for reception while listening to an actual radio program  
(refer to "Listening to Radio Broadcasts" ( page 19)).  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Connections  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
Connecting the Speakers  
After connecting the speakers, gently pull on the  
speaker cords to make sure the cords are firmly  
connected and do not pull out.  
Main unit (rear view)  
Speaker cord  
Speaker cord  
Speaker cord  
Red  
Red  
Black  
Black  
Left speaker (rear view)  
Right speaker (rear view)  
CAUTION  
You can detach the speaker cover.  
• Do not short-circuit the  
and  
speaker termi-  
nals. Doing so may damage the speakers.  
• Do not connect other speakers together with the  
supplied speakers. The change in impedance  
may damage the main unit and the speakers.  
• The speakers of this product are magnetically  
shielded, but color irregularities may occur on the  
TV depending on how the speakers are installed.  
Keep in mind the following.  
Speaker  
cover  
1. Turn off the main power of your TV before  
installing the speakers. Wait for about 30 min-  
utes before turning on the TV again.  
2. If color irregularity occurs in pictures, keep a  
distance of more than 10 cm between the TV  
and the speakers.  
NOTE  
• Improper speaker cord connection spoils the stereo  
effect and sound quality.  
• The impedance of speakers connected to this  
product must be within the range of 4 to 16 .  
• Cooling fan is built into the main unit for emitting  
generated heat. When you turn on the main unit,  
the internal cooling fan automatically starts  
rotating. To ensure sufficient cooling, leave a  
space of more than 1 cm between the main unit  
and the speakers or other objects.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
Connecting Other Equipment  
• For details of signals to be output, refer to page 39.  
• If connecting the main unit to equipment that has  
the function of a Dolby Digital decoder, the set-  
ting in "D. RANGE COMPRESSION" of "AUDIO"  
Read this section when connecting other audio  
equipment to this product.  
(
page 39) will be invalid regarding sound  
from the digital audio output of the main unit.  
Other audio  
equipment  
Connecting with a TV  
TV  
Supplied video cord  
VIDEO IN  
Main unit  
VIDEO  
CAUTION  
• Connect the main unit directly with a TV (or a  
monitor) without routing through a VCR. Otherwise  
it may cause picture distortion while playing back.  
(Such picture distortion is caused by a copy  
protection system, and thus it is not a malfunction.)  
TV  
Audio cord (not supplied)  
Main unit  
VCR  
(or monitor)  
Connecting directly  
CAUTION  
Also, if the main unit is connected to a TV with a  
built-in VCR, there may be picture distortion during  
playback.  
• Before connecting other equipment, turn off both  
the main unit and the equipment.  
NOTE  
Connecting with digital equipment  
• Please check that the setting for VIDEO OUT  
SELECT (PAL/NTSC) on the rear panel of the main  
unit and the color system on your TV set are the  
AV amplifier with a built-in  
decoder (not supplied)  
same. (  
page 6)  
You need to set "MONITOR TYPE" in the  
"PICTURE" menu correctly according to the aspect  
To an optical digital input  
terminal  
ratio of your TV. (  
page 38)  
Optical digital cable  
(not supplied)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Connections  
Connect all necessary parts before connecting the power plug.  
When a Clearer Picture Is  
Desired  
Connecting the Power Plug  
Main unit (rear view)  
AC outlet  
You can enjoy pictures of better quality using the  
following cord instead of the supplied video cord.  
Connecting by using the S-video cord  
S-video cord  
TV  
Main unit  
(not supplied)  
• After making all other necessary connections,  
connect in the power plug.  
S-VIDEO  
Connect the ends of S-video cord making  
sure that each end matches its compatible  
terminal.  
NOTE  
• The preset setting such as preset channels and  
sound adjustment may be erased in a few days in  
the following cases:  
- When you disconnect the power plug.  
- When a power failure occurs.  
Connecting by using the component  
video cord  
You can enjoy better quality pictures than when  
using the S-video cord.  
TV  
Demonstration display function  
When you connect the power plug into the AC  
outlet, "DEMO START!" appears in the display  
window and the demonstration display starts.  
When you press  
on the main unit, "DEMO  
OFF" appears in the display window and the  
demonstration display is canceled.  
Turning on the main unit automatically cancels the  
demonstration display.  
Component video cord  
(not supplied)  
Resuming the demonstration display  
With the power turned off, press  
unit.  
on the main  
Hiding the demonstration display  
With the power turned off, hold down  
until "DEMO CLEAR" appears.  
Disconnecting and then reconnecting the  
power plug does not start the demonstration  
display.  
Main unit  
CAUTION  
To activate the demonstration display again,  
• Use one of either the S-video cord or the  
component video cord. If both cords are used,  
pictures may not be played back properly.  
hold down  
appears.  
until "DEMO START!"  
NOTE  
• In order to enjoy pictures with the progressive  
mode (  
page 29), the TV is required to have  
progressive video input.  
• If the component video input jacks of your TV are  
BNC type, use a plug adapter (not supplied) to  
convert the plugs.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation/Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
This manual explains the operations assuming that  
you will use the remote control. Some buttons on  
the main unit are the same as those on the remote  
control. You can use either button in this case.  
2 Set the hour.  
Back  
Next  
• Holding down the button causes the hour to  
increment.  
You can use the number buttons to specify  
the hour.  
Refer to "Using the number buttons" shown  
below.  
Using the number buttons  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Examples: 3:  
13:  
20:  
23:  
3 Press  
.
Number buttons  
To return to step 2, press  
.
4 Set the minute in the same manner  
as steps 2 and 3.  
Adjusting the clock  
Press  
four times to display the clock, and  
then adjust the clock starting from step 2.  
CAUTION  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Displaying the clock while using the  
main unit  
Setting the Clock  
Press  
repeatedly.  
NOTE  
You can set the clock while the main unit is turned  
either on or off.  
Example: To set the clock to 10:10 a.m.  
• The time display on the main unit is a 24-hour  
clock.  
• The clock will gain or lose approximately 1 minute  
per month.  
• Set the clock again after you have disconnected  
the power plug or a power cut has occurred.  
1 Press  
.
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations  
Turning On/Off the Main Unit  
Adjusting the Sound Quality  
Selecting the sound mode  
Press  
(or  
on the main unit).  
• With the power off, pressing either button  
also turns on the main unit. The function  
assigned to the button starts working at the  
same time.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
Remote control:  
Main unit:  
: For emphasizing treble  
and bass sounds.  
: Adequate for songs  
and narrations.  
NOTE  
• Cooling fan is built into the main unit for emitting  
generated heat. When you turn on the main unit,  
the internal cooling fan automatically starts rotating.  
: For emphasizing treble  
sound.  
: For uplifting a feeling  
of being at a live per-  
formance.  
Adjusting the Volume  
: For adjusting treble and  
bass sounds of your  
choice (shown below).  
: Cancels the sound  
mode (initial setting).  
Press  
.
• While the sound mode is set to an item other  
You can also adjust the volume by turning  
the VOLUME control on the main unit.  
than "FLAT",  
is displayed in the  
display window.  
NOTE  
• You can adjust the volume within the range of 0 to  
40.  
NOTE  
• This function does not affect recording sound.  
Temporarily Turning Off the  
Sound (FADE MUTING)  
Adjusting bass/treble sound  
1 Press  
"MANUAL".  
2 For adjusting bass sound;  
Press  
For adjusting treble sound;  
Press  
repeatedly to display  
Press  
.
• "FADE MUTING" appears and the volume  
reduces to "0".  
To return to the previous volume, press  
.
again.  
Emphasizing Heavy Bass  
Sound (AHB PRO)  
.
You can adjust the sound quality within the  
range of -5 to +5.  
• The display returns to the sound source dis-  
play in a few seconds.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, AHB PRO  
NOTE  
function toggles between "ON" and  
"OFF".  
• While AHB PRO function is activated,  
• While the sound mode is set to an item other than  
"MANUAL", "NO OPERATE" is displayed in the dis-  
play window and you cannot adjust bass/treble  
sound.  
is displayed in the display  
window.  
• "AHB PRO" stands for "Active Hyper  
Bass PRO".  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 16.  
Changing the Color Patterns  
3 Press  
to adjust the intensity  
for the Display Window and  
Disc Tray  
of the component color.  
You can also adjust the color intensity by turn-  
ing the VOLUME control on the main unit.  
Press  
(or  
on the main unit).  
You can adjust the color intensity within the  
range of "0" to "3".  
You cannot set all three component colors  
(red, green, and blue) to "0" at the same time.  
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
: For a rainbow-like  
pattern.  
NOTE  
• After you have adjusted each component color, the  
display returns to the sound source display in  
approximately 8 seconds.  
• You cannot set different colors for the display  
window and disc tray.  
: For a flower-image  
pattern.  
• When you operate a button on the main unit or  
remote control, the display window and disc tray  
light in pale blue for approximately 2 seconds.  
• When recording finishes, the color of the display  
window and disc tray switches to the color set in  
"MANUAL" to inform you that recording has  
finished. (With an item other than "MANUAL"  
selected)  
: Gradually changes  
the color pattern in a  
cycle of approximately  
20 seconds.  
: For an ocean-image  
pattern.  
When you operate the main unit after recording  
finishes, the color pattern for the display window  
and disc tray returns to the selected pattern.  
: For a fantasy pattern.  
: For the color of your  
choice. (The setting  
shown on the left is  
initial setting.)  
Changing the brightness of the  
display window and disc tray  
(DIMMER)  
Press  
.
Setting your favorite color for the  
display window and disc tray  
• Each time you press  
as follows.  
, the display toggles  
1 Press  
"MANUAL".  
2 Press  
component color.  
repeatedly to display  
: Color pattern becomes  
dimmer.  
or  
to select a  
: Color pattern  
becomes darker, and  
switches to blue.  
: DIMMER 2 is automat-  
ically selected during  
video playback, and is  
canceled when the  
playback stops.  
: Cancels the brightness  
• Numerical value of the selected component  
color flashes.  
adjustment  
(initial setting).  
NOTE  
• Once you press  
to change the color pattern,  
the brightness returns to the initial setting. (except  
for DIMMER AUTO)  
• When you turn off the main unit, the brightness  
also returns to the initial setting.  
• You cannot turn off the color pattern.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
Listening to Radio Broadcasts  
This product can receive FM and AM radio  
broadcasts.  
Setting the AM Tuner Spacing  
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart,  
and other countries use 10 kHz spacing.  
On the main unit ONLY:  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Number buttons  
When the main unit is turned off  
To select 10 kHz spacing, while holding down  
on the main unit, press  
on the main unit to turn  
on the power. "AM 10 kHz" appears in the display  
window.  
To select 9 kHz spacing, while holding down  
on  
the main unit, press on the main unit to turn on  
the power. "AM 9 kHz" appears in the display  
window.  
NOTE  
• If the spacing is switched, the memory in which the  
radio stations were stored will be erased.  
CAUTION  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting a Radio Station  
Storing Radio Stations  
(Preset)  
1 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"FM" or "AM".  
You can store up to 30 FM radio stations and up to  
15 AM radio stations.  
Example: Display while an FM radio broadcast  
is received  
While the broadcast from the radio station  
you want to preset is being received  
Preset number (  
on the right)  
Stereo indicator  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
Frequency  
2 Press  
.
• The preset number flashes for approxi-  
mately 5 seconds.  
2 Press  
or  
repeatedly to  
select a radio station (frequency).  
You can also select a radio station using the  
automatic tuning.  
3 While the preset number is flash-  
ing, press the number buttons (  
Automatic tuning:  
-
or  
) to select the preset  
Hold down  
or  
until the fre-  
number you want to use.  
quency starts changing, and then release  
the button.  
When the main unit has received a broad-  
cast, the frequency automatically stops  
changing.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
4 While the selected number is  
flashing, press  
To quit the function while searching for a  
.
• "STORED" appears and the selected radio  
station is stored.  
broadcast, press  
or  
.
• When the main unit has received an FM  
stereo broadcast, "STEREO" lights up.  
NOTE  
• When you store a radio station to a preset number  
to which another radio station has previously been  
stored, the newly set radio station replaces the pre-  
viously stored radio station.  
NOTE  
• If an FM stereo broadcast is difficult to hear  
because of noise, you may be able to hear more  
easily by pressing  
to switch the sound to  
monaural reception. In this case, "MONO" lights up.  
To return the sound to stereo reception, press  
Tuning In to a Preset Radio  
Station  
again or select another FM radio station.  
• This product is not compatible with AM stereo  
broadcasts.  
While an FM or AM broadcast is being  
received  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
2 Use the number buttons to select  
the preset number of the radio sta-  
tion to which you want to tune in.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Discs  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
How to read this manual  
Playback  
• Operations are described by mainly using the  
remote control buttons. If there are the same  
marks on the main unit, the buttons on the main  
unit can also be used.  
• The following marks tell you for which type of the  
discs the operation can be made.  
(Refer to page 36 for playing back MP3/WMA and  
JPEG.)  
1 Press  
on the main unit.  
• The disc tray comes out.  
2 Place a disc on the disc tray.  
• The illustrations and TV screens may be different  
between the actual case and the description.  
• "VCD" stands for "Video CD".  
• "SVCD" stands for "Super Video CD".  
Letter-printed surface  
Disc tray  
• When you want to listen to an 8 cm disc,  
place it on the inner hollow of the disc tray.  
Remote control  
mode selector  
3 Press  
.
Display for DVD VIDEO  
Display while a DVD VIDEO is being played  
back:  
DVD indicator  
(The DVD indicator lights up while the DVD VIDEO is  
stopped. The DVD indicator flashes while the DVD  
VIDEO is being played back or paused.)  
Title number  
Chapter number  
Number buttons  
Elapsed playing time  
Display while the DVD VIDEO is stopped:  
Total number of titles  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display for CD  
Display for VCD/SVCD  
Display while a CD is being played back:  
Display while a VCD/SVCD is being played  
back:  
CD indicator  
(The CD indicator lights up while the CD is  
stopped. The CD indicator flashes while the  
CD is being played back or paused.)  
VCD indicator  
(The VCD indicator lights up while the VCD/SVCD  
is stopped. The VCD indicator flashes while the  
VCD/SVCD is being played back or paused.)  
Track number  
Elapsed playing time  
PBC indicator  
Track number  
(
page 23)  
Display while the CD is stopped:  
Total playing time  
Total number of tracks  
Elapsed playing time  
• PBC indicator is displayed while PBC is acti-  
vated.  
Display while the VCD/SVCD is stopped:  
Total number of tracks (*1, *2)  
Display for DVD AUDIO  
Display while a DVD AUDIO is being played  
back:  
DVD indicator  
(The DVD indicator lights up while the DVD AUDIO is  
stopped. The DVD indicator flashes while the DVD  
AUDIO is being played back or paused.)  
Group number  
Total playing time  
*1 "1" will appear after the total number of  
tracks is displayed.  
*2 "PBC" will appear when the disc is PBC-  
compatible.  
Track number  
NOTE  
• The menu may appear in the display window after  
DVD playback starts. In such a case, select the  
desired menu item by using the following buttons  
on the remote control.  
Elapsed playing time  
Display while the DVD AUDIO is stopped:  
Total number of groups  
• Select a menu item with  
,
or  
,
and then press  
.
• Select a menu item with the number buttons.  
• Operation may differ from the explanation given  
here, depending on the disc type.  
• "G1" and "T1" will appear after the total  
number of groups is displayed.  
(Continued on next page)  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Discs  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
Messages displayed on the TV screen  
While a DVD is selected as the sound  
source, the messages shown below are dis-  
played, depending on the status.  
PBC (Playback control)  
• PBC is a signal recorded in a VCD (ver-  
sion 2.0) for controlling VCD playback.  
You can operate software that has inter-  
active or search functions using the menu  
display recorded in a PBC-compatible  
VCD. To play back a VCD without PBC,  
follow the operation below.  
NOW READING  
The main unit is reading the disc. Wait for a  
while.  
• Select the desired track number with the  
number buttons while playback is  
stopped.  
REGION CODE ERROR!  
The disc cannot be played back because its  
region code is not compatible. (  
page 4)  
• While playback is stopped, press  
NO DISC  
or  
to select the desired track num-  
No disc is loaded.  
OPEN  
The disc tray is opening.  
ber, and then press  
• While a VCD or SVCD is being played  
.
CLOSE  
The disc tray is closing.  
back, press  
menu group.  
to return to the higher  
CANNOT PLAY  
You are trying to play back an unplayable  
disc.  
Playing Back from a Position  
10 Seconds Before  
(One Touch Replay)  
Guide icons temporarily displayed on  
the TV screen (on-screen guide)  
While a disc is being played back  
: Play  
(
Press  
.
page 21)  
: Pause  
NOTE  
(
page 24)  
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
• You cannot return to the previous title.  
: Fast reverse/Fast forward search  
(
page 24)  
:
Slow motion playback (reverse/  
forward directions)( page 25)  
: Containing multi-angle views  
page 27)  
(
: Containing multi-audio  
page 26)  
(
: Containing multi-subtitle  
page 27)  
(
: The disc cannot accept the operation  
you have attempted.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 21.  
Stopping Playback  
Pausing Playback  
While a disc is being played back  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
Press  
.
Resuming Playback (RESUME)  
To resume normal playback, press  
.
• Playback cannot be paused by pressing  
on the main unit during JPEG disc slide-show.  
When playback is stopped in the middle, playback  
can be started from the stopped scene.  
Advancing Picture Frame by  
Frame  
How to suspend playback  
While a disc is being played back  
Perform any of the following operations during  
playback.  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is paused  
Press  
Press  
once.*  
Press  
.
to turn off the power.  
• Each time you press  
, picture will be  
advanced frame by frame.  
Change the source to FM/AM or AUX.*  
You cannot operate this function with  
the main unit.  
on  
* Even if the power is turned off by pressing  
after this, the position where playback has  
been stopped will be stored.  
Fast Reverse/Fast Forward  
Search  
How to start playback from the stored  
position  
There are two methods.  
Press  
.
While a disc is being played back  
NOTE  
Press  
or  
.
• This function does not work in program playback or  
random playback.  
• The position where playback starts again may be  
a little different from the stopped position.  
• When a disc menu is displayed, the resume func-  
tion may not work.  
• The audio, the subtitle and the angle at that time  
are stored as well as the stopped position.  
• The stored position will be cleared if the disc tray  
• Each time you press  
increases as shown below.  
or  
, the speed  
×2 ×5 ×10  
×20  
×60  
To restore the normal speed, press  
.
Hold down  
or  
.
is opened. Further, if  
is pressed during  
is  
• Fast reverse/fast forward search can be car-  
ried out only while the button is pressed.  
playback, "RESUME" appears. If  
pressed at this time, "RESUME" will disappear  
and the stored information will be cleared.  
• Resume function is set to on as the initial  
preset. You can set the function to off  
NOTE  
• For a DVD VIDEO, SVCD or VCD, no sound comes  
out during fast reverse/fast forward search.  
• For a CD or DVD AUDIO, sound is intermittent  
during fast reverse/fast forward search.  
(
page 39).  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Basic Operations of the DVD Player  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 21.  
2 Press the number buttons (  
-
Slow Motion Playback  
or  
) to select the track/chapter  
you want to listen to.  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is paused  
NOTE  
• You can operate a VCD or SVCD while the disc is  
stopped or played back with PBC off.  
• You can operate a DVD AUDIO, CD, MP3, WMA,  
or JPEG while the disc is either played back or  
stopped.  
Press  
or  
.
• Each time you press  
increases as shown below.  
, the speed  
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
/
16  
8
32  
4
2
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
• Press  
to pause playback, and press  
to resume normal playback.  
Selecting a Track from the  
Menu Screen  
NOTE  
• No sound will be produced.  
• The picture motion in the reverse direction may  
not be smooth.  
• For a VCD or SVCD, slow motion playback can  
be carried out in the forward direction only.  
While a disc is stopped or being played  
back*  
Skipping to the Beginning of a  
Track  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
While a disc is being played back*  
2 Press  
or  
.
Press  
or  
.
• A menu screen of the disc appears.  
• Each time you press  
chapter/track/file skips to the beginning of the  
previous chapter/track/file.  
, the current  
• Only  
can be used for DVD AUDIOs.  
3 Press  
(only for a  
• Each time you press  
, the current chapter/  
track/file skips to the beginning of the next  
chapter/track/file.  
DVD VIDEO or a DVD AUDIO) or  
the number buttons to select a  
track you want to listen to.  
• Press  
group.  
or  
to select a title or  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
NOTE  
• If there are two or more pages of menu  
* For a VCD or SVCD, this operation can be carried  
out only during playback without the PBC function.  
• Except for a DVD VIDEO, this operation can also  
be carried out while the disc is stopped.  
• This operation may not be carried out for some  
discs.  
screen, press or to change the  
pages (only for a VCD or SVCD).  
4 Press  
.
NOTE  
* You can operate a VCD or SVCD while PBC is set  
to off.  
• You cannot perform this function with discs to  
which a menu screen is not recorded.  
• Some disc may start playback even if you do not  
Skipping to the Beginning of a  
Track with the Number Buttons  
press  
.
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Discs  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Selecting the Audio  
While a disc containing two or more audio  
is being played back  
AUDIO  
Remote control  
mode selector  
1 Press  
.
Example: TV screen  
Selected audio/Total  
number of audio  
Selected audio  
• Each time you press AUDIO , the audio will  
be changed. The audio can also be  
changed by pressing  
.
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
Number buttons  
NOTE  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
menu bar (  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to "Lan-  
guage Codes" ( page 41).  
page 34).  
• When 2 channel sounds are recorded in 1/2 and  
multi channel sounds with down-mix prohibited  
are recorded in 2/2 in a DVD AUDIO, you can  
select 1/2 only.  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Selecting the Subtitle  
Selecting a View Angle  
(only for moving image)  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc containing two or more subti-  
tles is being played back  
While a disc containing two or more view  
angles is being played back  
1 Press  
Example: TV screen  
.
1 Press  
Example: TV screen  
.
Selected view angle/  
Total number of view  
angles  
Selected subtitle/Total  
number of subtitles  
(When no subtitle is  
set in the disc, "--"  
appears.)  
Selected  
view angle  
Selected subtitle  
(When no  
subtitle is set in  
the disc, "OFF"  
appears.)  
• Each time you press  
be changed. The angle can also be  
changed by pressing  
, the angle will  
.
2 Press  
subtitle.  
to select a  
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
3 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
NOTE  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
NOTE  
menu bar (  
page 34).  
• You can also operate this function by using the  
menu bar (  
page 34).  
Magnifying the Picture (ZOOM)  
• For an SVCD, each time you press  
in step  
1, the subtitle type and ON/OFF will be changed.  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to "Lan-  
guage Codes" (  
• The manner of displaying subtitles may be differ-  
ent depending on the disc.  
page 41).  
(only for moving image)  
While a disc is played back or paused  
1 Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, the picture  
Canceling the subtitle  
magnification will be changed (OFF,  
ZOOM1 - 6).  
Press  
to select "OFF".  
• When a JPEG disc is used, the picture  
magnification changes through "ZOOM  
1", "ZOOM 2" to "OFF". You cannot  
change the picture magnification during  
slide-show playback.  
2 Select the portion you want to see  
by pressing  
.
CAUTION  
• When you magnify a picture, image quality may be  
deteriorated or image may be distorted.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Example:  
Adjusting the Picture Quality  
(VFP)  
5 Press  
value.  
to change the  
While a disc is played back or paused  
6 Press  
.
1 Press  
.
To adjust other items, go back to step 3.  
Example: TV screen  
7 Press  
.
Current VFP mode  
USER1  
NOTE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
• If no operation is made for several seconds during  
the procedure, the settings made so far will be  
automatically stored.  
• "VFP" stands for "video fine processor".  
Creating Realistic Sound  
(3D PHONIC)  
Setting items  
GAMMA  
: Controls the brightness of neutral  
tints while maintaining the  
brightness of dark and light  
portions.  
The two speakers produce an effect resembling  
surround-sound.  
(Setting range: –3 - +3)  
BRIGHTNESS: Controls the brightness of the  
display.  
(Setting range: –8 - +8)  
CONTRAST : Controls the contrast of the  
display.  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
Example: TV screen  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
SATURATION : Controls the saturation of the  
display.  
3D PHONIC  
ACTION  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
: Controls the tint of the display.  
(Setting range: –7 - +7)  
SHARPNESS : Controls the sharpness of the  
display.  
• Each time you press  
as follows.  
, the display toggles  
TINT  
: Suitable for action movies,  
sport programs or other  
lively programs.  
ACTION  
(Setting range: –8 - +8)  
: You can relax with a natural  
atmosphere.  
DRAMA  
2 Press  
to select VFP mode.  
NORMAL  
: For normal playback.  
: You can enjoy the sound  
effect as if you were  
watching the movie in a  
theater.  
THEATER  
OFF  
(You cannot adjust the image  
quality.) Go to step 7.  
: Suitable when viewing a movie in  
a dim room.  
(You cannot adjust the image  
quality.) Go to step 7.  
CINEMA  
: Cancels 3D phonic (initial  
setting).  
• While 3D phonic is activated,  
displayed in the display window.  
is  
USER1/USER2: You can adjust the image quality.  
Go to step 3.  
NOTE  
3 Press  
to select an item  
you want to adjust.  
• 3D phonic is effective for both the speakers and  
headphones.  
• When noise is produced or sound is distorted,  
4 Press  
.
set  
"
3D PHONIC  
"
to "OFF".  
• You cannot operate some types of DVD AUDIO  
discs.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Adjusting Playback Level  
(DVD LEVEL)  
Enjoying Better Pictures  
(PROGRESSIVE)  
In the progressive mode, you can enjoy better  
pictures.  
The audio of a DVD VIDEO and DVD AUDIO may  
be recorded at a lower level (volume) than for  
other types of disc. You can adjust the DVD level.  
CAUTION  
• In order to enjoy pictures in the progressive mode,  
the following requirements should be met.  
• There must be component video input termi-  
nals on the TV set connected to the main unit.  
• The main unit and the TV set must be con-  
nected using a component video cord  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
, the display  
(
page 15).  
toggles as follows in the display window.  
When the above requirements are not satisfied,  
leave the main unit in the Interlace mode. If the  
progressive mode is set, pictures may be dis-  
torted.  
: Sound level recorded in the  
DVD.  
: Enhances the sound level  
(initial setting).  
While the disc is played back or paused  
: Enhances the sound level to the  
highest level.  
Hold down  
.
• Each time you press  
toggles as follows.  
, the display  
• Select the level while listening to the  
sound played back.  
Interlace mode (initial setting)  
NOTE  
• DVD level is effective only for playback of a DVD.  
• Even if the DVD level is changed, the output  
level from the digital audio output terminal will not  
be changed.  
• This function does not affect recording sound.  
Progressive mode  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Playing Back the Bonus  
Group  
Browsable Still Pictures  
(B.S.P.)  
There are some DVD AUDIO discs with a special  
group, called "bonus group", recorded.  
There are some DVD AUDIO discs with still pic-  
tures recorded. Among the still pictures, there are  
pictures called B.S.P. (browsable still pictures).  
You can change these pictures as if turning over  
pages.  
Bonus indicator  
• This operation can be carried out when  
"BONUS" is lit in the display window on  
the main unit.  
B.S.P. indicator  
• This operation can be carried out when  
"B.S.P." is lit in the display window on the  
main unit.  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Press  
.
• Each time you press  
will be switched over.  
, the still picture  
2 Press  
repeatedly during  
playback to select a bonus group.  
You can also change the pictures by  
pressing  
.
• "KEY_ _ _ _" appears on the TV screen  
and in the display window on the main  
unit.  
Example: TV screen  
Selected page/  
Total number of  
pages  
3 Press the number buttons to enter  
a pin code (4 digits).  
• The method of getting a pin code is  
different depending on the disc.  
Selected page  
(still picture)  
4 Press  
.
• When a correct pin code is entered,  
"BONUS" disappears and the playback  
of the bonus group starts.  
2 Wait for a few seconds or press  
.
• If an incorrect pin code is entered, try  
entering a correct pin code again.  
NOTE  
• You can operate this function on the menu bar  
(
page 34).  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
Example: For DVD VIDEO  
Playing Back the Disc in the  
Desired Order (Program  
Playback)  
TV screen  
Program  
screen  
You can program a maximum of 99 chapters or  
tracks. You can program the same chapter or track  
more than once.  
While a disc is stopped  
3 Press the number buttons (  
-
or  
) to program chapters/  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
tracks.  
Display for DVD VIDEO  
• Select a title number, and then select a  
chapter number.  
Title number Chapter number  
2 Press  
to select "PROGRAM".  
Display for DVD VIDEO  
Program number  
Program indicator  
Display for DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
• Select a group number, and then select a  
track number.  
Display for DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
DVD, MP3 or WMA  
DVD, MP3 or WMA  
Track number  
Group number  
Program indicator  
Program number  
Display for CD/VCD/SVCD  
Display for CD/VCD/SVCD  
• Select a track number.  
Track number  
CD or VCD  
"VCD" is displayed while  
VCD/SVCD is selected.  
Program indicator  
Program number  
Total time for  
program playback  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Example: For DVD VIDEO  
Random Playback  
TV screen  
1
5
You can listen to tracks or chapters in random  
order.  
While playback is stopped  
1 Press  
"RANDOM".  
repeatedly to select  
• Refer to "Using the number buttons"  
page 16).  
(
Example: For CD  
• Before selecting a bonus group of a DVD  
AUDIO, cancel the "BONUS" display as  
explained in "Playing back the Bonus  
Group" on page 30.  
• When you try to enter more than 99 chap-  
ters or tracks, "MEMORY FULL" appears.  
Random indicator  
• "RANDOM" appears in the TV screen.  
4 Press  
.
2 Press  
.
Confirming programmed content  
NOTE  
While playback is stopped, press  
• Pressing  
back to the previous track.  
repeatedly does not return play-  
or  
repeatedly.  
• During this operation, you can add a  
track as the last in the program, or erase  
• Each track is played back once.  
the last track. (  
step 3)  
Canceling random playback  
Canceling program playback  
While playback is stopped, press  
While playback is stopped, press  
repeatedly to display an item  
repeatedly to display an item  
other than "RANDOM".  
other than "PROGRAM".  
• This operation does not erase the pro-  
grammed content.  
NOTE  
• Ejecting the disc or turning off the main unit also  
cancels random playback.  
Erasing the whole program  
While playback is stopped, hold down  
.
NOTE  
• Ejecting the disc or turning off the main unit also  
erases the programmed content. This operation  
also cancels program playback.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Convenient Functions of the DVD Player  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 26.  
Repeat Playback  
Refer to page 37 for repeat playback of MP3/WMA  
and JPEG files.  
While a disc is being played back  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
will be changed.  
, the repeat type  
For DVD VIDEO  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
Repeat types  
TV screen  
CHAP*  
TITLE  
Repeats the  
current chapter  
REPEAT  
CHAPTER*  
Repeats the  
current title  
REPEAT  
TITLE  
ALL  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
OFF  
For DVD AUDIO  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Repeats the  
current track  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
TRACK*  
GROUP  
OFF  
Repeats the  
current group  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
GROUP  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
For CD/VCD/SVCD  
Display in the  
display window  
on the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Repeats the  
current track  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
TRACK*  
ALL  
Repeats all  
tracks  
REPEAT  
ALL  
ALL  
REPEAT  
OFF  
Cancels repeat  
OFF  
* "STEP" is displayed during program playback or  
random playback.  
NOTE  
• For a VCD and SVCD, the operation can be carried  
out during playback without the PBC function  
(
page 23).  
• You can also operate this function on the menu  
bar ( page 34).  
• For details on A-B repeat (repeat playback of a  
designated part), refer to page 35.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status Bar and Menu Bar  
Changes time information displayed in  
the display window on the main unit and  
the status bar. Each time  
is  
Time display  
selection  
pressed, the display will be changed.  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
TOTAL : Elapsed playing time of current title/  
group  
Remote control  
mode selector  
T.REM : Remaining time of current title/group  
TIME : Elapsed playing time of current  
chapter/track  
REM  
:
Remaining time of current chapter/track  
CD/VCD/SVCD  
TIME : Elapsed playing time of current track  
REM : Remaining time of current track  
TOTAL : Elapsed playing time of disc  
T.REM : Remaining time of disc  
page 33  
Number buttons  
Repeat mode  
Time search  
page 35  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
Selects a chapter/track. Press the  
number buttons to enter the chapter/  
track number and press  
Examples:  
.
Chapter search/  
Track search  
You can display the status bar and menu bar on  
the TV screen, and can control discs with the bars.  
5:  
24:  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/VCD/SVCD  
CAUTION  
page 26  
Audio  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/SVCD  
page 27  
Subtitle  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO  
Using the Status Bar and  
Menu Bar  
page 27  
View angle  
Page switch  
DVD AUDIO  
Switches the still pictures (B.S.P.)  
recorded on a DVD AUDIO disc.  
While a disc is being played back  
page 30  
1 Press  
twice.  
Information displayed on the status bar  
Status bar  
DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO (the example below is  
for a DVD VIDEO)  
Menu bar  
• The above is an example for a DVD VIDEO.  
Time Playback status  
Transfer rate  
(only for DVD VIDEO)  
(DVD VIDEO)  
Current chapter number  
(DVD AUDIO)  
(DVD VIDEO)  
2 Press  
to select an item you  
Current title number  
(DVD AUDIO)  
Current track number  
want to operate.  
Current group number  
3 Press  
.
VCD/SVCD/CD (the example below is for a CD)  
You can set the selected function. For the  
setting items, refer to the following "Function  
list".  
Time Playback status  
Playback mode  
• The currently active function shows blue.  
Current track number  
NOTE  
To cancel the menu bar, press  
.
• The playback status mark has the same meaning of  
Function list  
the mark on the on-screen guide (  
page 23).  
Press  
to select, and press  
to  
determine unless otherwise noted.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Status Bar and Menu Bar  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 34.  
Playing Back the Designated  
Part Repeatedly  
(A-B Repeat Playback)  
Designate the Time  
(Time Search)  
While a disc is being played back  
While a disc is being played back  
1 Set the remote control mode  
selector to AUDIO.  
1 Press  
twice.  
• The menu bar (  
page 34) appears.  
2 Press  
3 Press  
to select  
.
2 Press  
twice.  
• The menu bar appears (  
page 34).  
.
4 Press  
to select  
3 Press  
4 Press  
5 Enter the time using the number  
to select  
.
.
A
B
.
5 Press  
at the starting point of  
the part to be repeated (designat-  
ing A point).  
buttons ( ).  
-
,
Example: When you want to play back a  
disc from the position of (0 hour)  
23 minutes 45 seconds, press  
the buttons in the order:  
• The icon on the menu bar will be  
.
6 Press  
at the end of the part to  
be repeated (designating B point).  
• The icon on the menu bar will be  
.
"
A-B" appears in the display window on  
You can skip entering "minutes" and  
"seconds".  
the main unit and the part between A and B  
points is played back repeatedly.  
• If you enter wrong numbers, press  
to  
Canceling A-B repeat playback  
delete the numbers, and then enter the  
numbers again.  
To cancel A-B repeat playback:  
• Press  
.
6 Press  
.
• Select  
(Select  
and press  
.)  
twice.  
To delete the menu bar, press  
.
NOTE  
NOTE  
• You may not be able to operate this function  
depending on the disc.  
• You can operate a VCD and SVCD while the disc is  
played back with PBC off.  
• This function does not work during program play-  
back or random playback.  
• For a CD, this operation can always be carried  
out. For a VCD or SVCD, the operation can be  
carried out when the disc is stopped or during  
playback without the PBC function.  
• A-B repeat playback is possible only within the  
same title or track. A-B repeat playback cannot  
be carried out during PBC playback, program  
playback, random playback and repeat playback.  
• Time search for a DVD VIDEO is from the  
beginning of the title, for a DVD AUDIO is from  
the beginning of the track being played back.  
Time search for a VCD, SVCD and a CD is as  
follows:  
• When the disc is stopped, time search is from  
the beginning of the disc.  
• When the disc is being played back, time search  
is within the track currently being played back.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG Discs  
Playback  
Display of an MP3/WMA disc is described here as  
an example.  
For a JPEG disc, read "track" as "file".  
Remote control  
mode selector  
NOTE  
• When playing back a disc containing both MP3/  
WMA and JPEG files, set one of them to be played  
(
page 38).  
1 Insert a disc.  
Example: TV screen  
This indicator lights up  
during repeat playback  
This indicator lights up  
during program playback  
(
page 37).  
Elapsed playing time of  
the selected track  
(only for MP3/WMA).  
(
page 31).  
Group list  
Number buttons  
Tag information of the  
selected track  
(only for MP3s/WMAs)  
Track list (Tracks con-  
tained in the selected  
group)  
Example: Display window  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Group number  
Track number  
"WMA" is displayed when a WMA disc  
is loaded, and "JPG" is displayed when  
a JPEG disc is loaded.  
2 Press  
3 Press  
to select a group.  
to move to the track list.  
• Pressing  
returns to the group list.  
(Continued on next page)  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Playing Back MP3/WMA and JPEG Discs  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 36.  
4 Press  
5 Press  
to select a track.  
.
Repeat Playback  
or  
Example: Display during playback  
While a disc is being played back  
Group number  
Track number  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
changed.  
, the repeat type is  
Display in the  
display window on  
the main unit  
Display on the  
TV screen  
Repeat types  
Elapsed playing time  
(This indicator is not displayed  
while a JPEG is loaded.)  
• At first, a track title (file name) is scrolled.  
Repeats the  
current track  
(only for MP3/  
WMA)  
REPEAT  
TRACK*  
REPEAT*  
TRACK  
• When an MP3 or WMA is loaded, tag information  
(title/artist/album) is scrolled followed by a track  
title.  
• Only alphanumerical one-byte characters are  
displayed properly as a track title or tag informa-  
tion.  
Repeats the  
current group  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
REPEAT  
GROUP  
GROUP  
ALL  
Repeats the  
entire disc  
REPEAT  
ALL  
REPEAT ALL  
No display  
Cancels repeat  
playback  
REPEAT  
OFF  
NOTE  
* "STEP" is displayed during program playback and  
random playback.  
• You can also use  
You can also use the number buttons in step 4. In  
this case, steps 3 and 5 are not needed. Refer to  
and  
in step 2.  
NOTE  
“Using the number buttons” (  
page 16).  
• The repeat types can also be changed while the  
disc is stopped.  
• The repeat playback is automatically canceled if  
there is a file that cannot be played back  
• You can also use or  
in step 4. In this  
case, step 3 is not needed.  
(
page 4).  
Slide-show playback  
• For a JPEG disc, when you press  
in step  
5, files are continuously played back from the  
selected file (slide-show playback). When you  
press  
, only a selected file is played back.  
• A file is displayed for approximately 3 seconds  
in a slide-show playback.  
• After all files are played back, the playback is  
automatically stopped.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preferences  
LANGUAGE  
NOTE  
• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc,  
the optimum language set for the disc appears.  
• For a language code such as "AA", refer to the  
"Language Codes" (  
page 41).  
Number buttons  
Items  
Contents  
MENU LANGUAGE Select the language for the DVD VIDEO menu.  
AUDIO LANGUAGE Select the audio language for the DVD VIDEO.  
Select the subtitle language for the DVD  
VIDEO.  
SUBTITLE  
ON SCREEN  
LANGUAGE  
Select the language displayed on the preference  
screens.  
You can change the initial settings of this product  
according to the environment the product is used  
in.  
PICTURE  
Items  
Contents (  
: initial setting)  
CAUTION  
MONITOR Select a display method suitable for your TV.  
TYPE  
16 : 9 /16 : 9 MULTI (wide TV):  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your wide  
TV is fixed to 16:9 (when playing back a DVD  
VIDEO recorded at 4:3, this product automatically  
adjusts the screen width of the output signal).  
NOTE  
• The top and bottom of the preference screen may  
not be displayed on a wide TV. Adjust the picture  
size on the TV.  
4 : 3 LB/4 : 3 MULTI LB (letter box):  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your TV is  
conventional 4:3. While viewing a wide screen  
picture, the black bars appear on the top and  
bottom of the screen.  
Basic Operations  
This section explains basic operation for changing  
various settings.  
While a disc is stopped or no disc is loaded  
(while "NO DISC" is displayed)  
4 : 3 PS/4 : 3 MULTI PS (pan scan):  
Select this item when the aspect ratio of your TV is  
conventional 4:3. While viewing a wide screen  
picture, the left and right edges of the picture will not  
be shown on the screen. (If the disc is not  
compatible with the pan scan, the picture will be  
displayed at the letter box ratio.)  
1 Press  
.
• "SETTING" appears in the display window  
on the main unit and the following screen  
appears on the TV.  
PICTURE Select an item suitable to the video source.  
SOURCE VIDEO:  
Select this item when you want to view a normal  
video.  
FILM:  
Select this item when you want to view a film or  
video recorded with the progressive scan method.  
AUTO:  
The video source type (a video or film) is  
automatically selected.  
• Proceed with operations by following the  
description on the TV screen.  
SCREEN Select the screen saver mode between  
/OFF  
ON  
SAVER  
(screen saver activates when there is no operation  
made for about 5 minutes since a still picture was  
last displayed).  
FILE  
TYPE  
If a disc includes an AUDIO file (MP3/WMA) and a  
still picture file (JPEG), select which file is played  
back. If you change this setting, open and close the  
disc tray, or momentarily turn off the main unit. (A  
disc either with audio files or still picture files can be  
played back regardless of this setting.)  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Preferences  
AUDIO  
OTHERS  
Items  
RESUME  
Contents (  
page 24)  
: initial setting)  
Items  
Contents (  
: initial setting)  
(
DIGITAL  
Select an output signal type from the  
following in accordance with the  
equipment connected to the digital audio  
output terminal (AV amplifier, etc.). (See the  
list below for the preference items and  
output signal.)  
AUDIO  
ON SCREEN Select whether you display guide icons on  
GUIDE  
OUTPUT  
the on-screen guide indicating status of a  
disc/main unit (For details on the guide  
icons, refer to page 23)  
AV COMPU  
LINK MODE  
When you want to control JVC TV by using  
this product, select a mode that matches  
the terminal from the following. (For more  
details, refer to "Using AV COMPU LINK"  
on page 51.)  
PCM ONLY:  
Equipment corresponding only to linear PCM.  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM:  
Dolby digital decoder or equipment having the  
same function.  
DVD1 :  
Connect to the video-3 input on the TV set.  
STREAM/PCM :  
DTS/Dolby digital decoder or equipment  
having the same function.  
DVD2:  
Connect to the video-1 input of the TV set.  
DOWN MIX  
Switch signal from the digital output  
DVD3:  
terminal of the DVD VIDEO according to  
the connected equipment. Select this when  
Digital Audio Output is set to "PCM ONLY".  
Connect to the video-2 input of the TV set.  
PARENTAL  
LOCK  
Set the parental lock function to cut off  
violent scenes or replace the scenes with  
others. (This is effective only for discs  
equipped with the parental lock function.)  
DOLBY SURROUND :  
A dolby pro logic decoder-built-in equipment.  
STEREO:  
An ordinary equipment.  
COUNTRY CODE (  
page 40)  
Select your country or area.  
SET LEVEL:  
The restriction is stricter as the number  
becomes smaller. "NONE" is no restriction.  
• When 3D phonic is activated, Down Mix  
does not work.  
D (Dynamic).  
RANGE  
To make adjustments for the difference  
between a high volume and a low volume  
PASSWORD (essential):  
Enter four-digit number as your password  
using the number buttons (1-9, 0) every time.  
(Enter "8888" if you forget your password.)  
The password is required at the time of  
playback.  
COMPRESSION when playing back with low volume (only  
for a DVD recorded with Dolby digital).  
:
AUTO  
D. range compression automatically works.  
ON:  
• If you enter a wrong password three times,  
"EXIT" will be automatically selected.  
D. range compression always works.  
List of relationships of DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT preference items and output  
signal  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT preference  
Playback disc  
STREAM/PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM  
PCM ONLY  
48 kHz, 16/20/24 bits  
Linear PCM DVD VIDEO  
96 kHz linear PCM DVD VIDEO  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
48/96/192 kHz,  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
16/20/24 bits linear PCM DVD AUDIO  
44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,  
16/20/24 bits linear PCM DVD AUDIO  
DTS DVD VIDEO  
DTS bit stream  
DOLBY DIGITAL bit stream  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM  
DOLBY DIGITAL DVD VIDEO/  
DVD AUDIO  
48 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear  
PCM  
CD/VCD/SVCD  
DTS CD  
44.1 kHz, 16 bits stereo linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
DTS bit stream 44.1 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bits linear PCM  
MP3/WMA disc  
NOTE  
• For a DVD VIDEO without content protection set, there is a 20 bit or 24 bit output at the digital audio output terminal.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Country/Area Codes  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Language Codes  
Code Language  
Code Language  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DA  
DZ  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FI  
Afar  
MK  
ML  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
NL  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Dutch  
NO  
OC  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
OM (Afan) Oromo  
OR  
PA  
PL  
PS  
PT  
QU  
Oriya  
Panjabi  
Polish  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Corsican  
Czech  
Welsh  
Danish  
Bhutani  
RM Rhaeto-Romance  
RN  
RO  
RU  
Kirundi  
Rumanian  
Russian  
Greek  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fiji  
Faroese  
Frisian  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
FJ  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
IE  
IK  
IN  
IS  
IW  
JI  
JW  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
SK  
SL  
Irish  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SV  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Hindi  
Siswati  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swedish  
SW Swahili  
TA  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
TK  
TL  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
Tamil  
Telugu  
Tajik  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
Yiddish  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
Kirghiz  
Latin  
Lingala  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
TW Twi  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
VO  
WO Wolof  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Uzbek  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
LV  
MG Malagasy  
MI  
Maori  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to Discs/Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Listening to Cassette Tapes  
Cassette tape indicator  
(The cassette tape indicator lights up while the cas-  
sette tape is stopped. The cassette tape indicator  
flashes while the cassette tape is being played back.)  
Reverse mode  
Cassette tape playback  
direction ( : normal direc-  
tion/ : opposite direction)  
CAUTION  
• Before using a cassette tape, wind up any slack in  
the cassette tape. (  
page 52)  
• Do not use long cassette tapes such as C-120 or  
C-150. Long cassette tapes are thin and stretch  
easily, and may become tangled in the inner part  
of the main unit.  
• This product is compatible with playback of  
TYPE I cassette tapes. Playback of TYPE II or  
TYPE IV cassette tapes is not recommended,  
because this product does not meet the specifi-  
cations for these tapes. The main unit does not  
produce the proper sound from these cassette  
tape types.  
Operation  
2 Press  
repeatedly to select  
the reverse mode.  
Stop  
Press  
.
: For one return playback of both  
sides.  
Press  
• When a cassette tape is played back  
in the normal direction ( ), is  
or  
.
: For repeated playback of both sides  
(Playback continues until playback is  
stopped.)  
fast forward and is rewind.  
Fast forward/  
Rewind  
• When the cassette tape is played  
back in the opposite direction ( ),  
: For one-way playback of either side.  
is fast forward and  
rewind.  
• You can perform the same operation  
is  
3 Press  
.
• Playback starts.  
by pressing or  
.
• When the main unit is turned off, pressing  
automatically turns on the main unit.  
1 Insert a cassette tape.  
• Each time you press  
, the cassette tape  
playback direction changes. The initial play-  
back direction after you have inserted a cas-  
sette tape is always the normal direction.  
• The cassette tape playback direction indica-  
tor facing right is displayed during normal  
playback. The indicator facing left is dis-  
played during reverse playback.  
Insert a cassette tape  
with the side you want to  
listen to facing up.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Listening to Other Equipment/Recording Sound  
Listening to Other Equipment  
Adjusting the Sound Input  
Level from Other Equipment  
Adjusting the sound input level of the  
AUX  
1 Press  
.
2 Hold down  
until the input level  
appears.  
• Each time you hold down  
toggles as follows.  
, the display  
For ordinary use.  
(initial setting)  
For increasing the level.  
1 Press  
.
2 Start other equipment playback.  
• Refer to the operation manual for the con-  
nected equipment.  
3 Adjust the volume and make other  
necessary settings.  
• For adjusting the volume and making other  
necessary settings, refer to "Basic Opera-  
tions" (  
page 17).  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
Main unit  
Preventing recorded sound from  
being erased  
• Write protect tags are attached to a cassette  
tape for preventing the erasing of recorded  
sound. They enable you to avoid losing impor-  
tant recordings because once you snap off the  
write protect tags, you cannot record to the cas-  
sette tape or erase recorded material.  
• When you want to use the cassette tape for  
recording again, cover the tag holes with adhe-  
sive tape.  
Remote control  
Write protect  
tag for side A  
Write protect  
tag for side B  
1 Insert a cassette tape for record-  
ing.  
• Before inserting the cassette tape, wind the  
tape past the leader part of the cassette  
tape.  
Magnetic tape  
(recordable part)  
Leader tape (unrecordable part)  
2 Press  
mode.  
to select the reverse  
NOTE  
• Each time you press  
gles as follows.  
, the display tog-  
• The sound input level during recording is automati-  
cally adjusted.  
• When you record tracks from a disc, a 4-second  
blank is inserted between tracks in the recording.  
You can record tracks with no blank time.  
: For one-way recording on either  
side.  
: For one return recording on both  
sides.  
(
page 45)  
: Pressing  
automatically  
CAUTION  
starts one return recording on  
both sides.  
You can change the reverse mode during  
• It may be unlawful to record or playback  
copyright material without the consent of the  
copyright owner.  
recording.  
• Do not use long cassette tapes such as C-120 or  
C-150. Long cassette tapes are thin and stretch  
easily, and may become tangled in the inner part  
of the main unit.  
• Since this product is not compatible with TYPE II  
and TYPE IV cassette tapes, do not use these  
types of cassette tapes. This product does not  
meet the specifications for these tapes, so sound  
is not properly recorded to these types of cas-  
sette tapes. You cannot obtain proper playback  
sound.  
(Continued on next page)  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Recording Sound to Cassette Tapes  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 44.  
3
Select a sound source for recording.  
Recording the Second or  
Subsequent Track to the Last  
Track from a Disc  
Sound source  
Operation  
Press  
, and then press  
.
Disc  
(The disc is stopped.)  
(For a DVD VIDEO: while the disc is paused)  
Select the radio station whose broad-  
Radio  
For a CD/VCD/SVCD/DVD VIDEO  
Before proceeding to step 4, select the  
starting track/chapter number by  
broadcast  
cast you want to record (  
page 19).  
Sound from  
other  
equipment  
(AUX)  
Press  
and prepare playback on  
the other equipment (  
page 43).  
pressing  
or  
.
For a DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA  
Before proceeding to step 4, select the  
4 Press  
on the main unit.  
Example: Display while CD sound is recorded  
group number by pressing  
, and then select the track num-  
ber by pressing or  
or  
.
Program Recording from a  
Disc  
• When you record from a disc, all tracks are  
recorded to the cassette tape.  
• When you want to record sound from other  
equipment, start playback on the connected  
equipment.  
• When recording finishes, the color pattern of  
the display window and disc tray switches to  
the color pattern set in "MANUAL" to inform  
Before proceeding to step 4, program  
the tracks you want to record  
(
page 31).  
you that recording has finished (  
18).  
page  
Recording with No Blank Time  
between Tracks  
Quitting Recording  
Before proceeding to step 4, play back  
a disc, pause the playback, and then  
Press  
.
press  
of the first track.  
to return to the beginning  
Recording Only One Track  
from a Disc  
Erasing Recorded Sound  
from a Cassette Tape  
(Excluding DVD VIDEOs)  
Before proceeding to step 4, play back  
the track you want to record.  
Select the sound from other equip-  
ment (AUX) in step 3, and then press  
• Pressing  
in step 4 returns playback to  
.
the beginning of the track and only that track  
is recorded.  
• Do not play back any tracks on the  
connected equipment.  
NOTE  
• If the cassette tape reverses direction while a track  
is being recorded from a disc, this product starts  
recording that track again from the beginning onto  
the reverse side of the cassette tape. However, if  
12 or less seconds of that track were recorded onto  
the first side of the cassette tape, recording to the  
reverse side of the cassette tape starts from the  
beginning of the previous track.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Sound/Convenient Functions  
Set the clock beforehand (  
page 16).  
Using the Timers  
Sleep Timer  
When the specified time passes, the main unit  
automatically turns off.  
Press  
.
• Each time you press  
(in minutes) toggles as follows.  
, the time display  
Remote control  
mode selector  
Cancel (Sleep  
indicator disappears.)  
Example: Display while the sleep timer is set to  
60 minutes  
Sleep indicator  
Number buttons  
NOTE  
• When you set the sleep timer, the display window  
automatically dims.  
• Before the clock has been set (While "0:00" is  
flashing), when you press  
ADJUST!" appears.  
, "CLOCK  
Changing the sleep timer setting  
• Press  
repeatedly to select the time again.  
Confirming the sleep timer setting  
(remaining time)  
• With the sleep timer activated, press  
once.  
NOTE  
• Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO before using the number buttons.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Using the Timers  
ONCE  
: The recording timer works  
once.  
Recording Timer  
EVERYDAY : The recording timer works  
every day.  
You can use the recording timer function to record  
FM/AM broadcasts or sound from other equipment  
to cassette tape.  
You can enter up to three timer settings in total for  
the recording timer and the playback timer  
7 Press  
8 Press  
.
or  
to select "REC  
(
page 48).  
TIMER".  
• "REC" stands for "Recording".  
NOTE  
• Timer settings remain unchanged until the timer is  
replaced by new setting.  
9 Press  
10 Press  
.
or  
sound source.  
to select a  
1 Prepare the sound source.  
Radio  
Preset the radio station whose  
broadcast you want to record.  
Example: To record an FM broadcast to a  
cassette tape  
(
page 20)  
Other  
equipment  
Follow the operation manual for the  
equipment.  
2 Insert a cassette tape. (  
42)  
page  
• When you want to record sound from other  
equipment, you cannot use the recording  
timer function to start playback on any  
equipment other than this product.  
3 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"TIMER1", "TIMER2" or "TIMER3".  
When you want to record an FM/AM radio  
broadcast  
Example: When "TIMER1" is selected  
• Press  
, and then press  
,
or  
the number buttons to select the preset  
number of the radio station whose broad-  
cast you want to record. Refer to "Using  
the number buttons" (  
page 16).  
Timer number  
11 Press  
.
4 Press  
5 Press  
.
• The settings appear in the display window.  
Confirm the settings.  
,
or  
to set the  
starting time and ending time.  
12 When the main unit is on, press  
to turn off the main unit.  
Example:To set the recording time from 6:30  
a.m. to 6:45 a.m.  
• While the recording timer is functioning, the  
volume is set to "0" and no sound is pro-  
duced from the speakers or headphones.  
• The recording timer is available only when  
the main unit is turned off.  
You can use the number buttons to set the  
recording time. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
• For setting the clock, refer to "Setting the  
Clock" ( page 16).  
page 16).  
NOTE  
• During operation, you can return to the previous  
Entering the "hour" →  
"minute" →  
Entering the  
step by pressing  
. You can quit the recording  
timer settings by pressing  
not stored.  
. The settings are  
6 Press  
or  
to select  
"ONCE" or "EVERYDAY".  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Convenient Functions  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 46.  
Playback Timer  
Canceling the recording timer  
In step 2 on page 47, select the timer number you  
want to cancel, and then press  
1 Prepare the sound source you  
want to play back.  
.
Even when you cancel the recording timer, the set-  
ting remains stored.  
Disc  
Make sure that a disc is loaded.  
page 21)  
(
Cassette  
tape  
Insert a cassette tape. (  
page 42)  
Activating the recording timer again  
Radio  
Preset the radio station whose broadcast  
you want to listen to. ( page 20)  
Follow the operation manual for the  
In step 2 on page 47, select the timer number you  
want to activate, and then press  
repeatedly  
Other  
until all of the setting procedure finishes. Then turn  
off the main unit.  
equipment equipment.  
NOTE  
2 Press  
repeatedly to select  
"TIMER1", "TIMER2" or "TIMER3".  
• When you want to activate two or three recording  
timers, leave a blank time of 2 or more minutes  
between the ending time of the first recording timer  
and the starting time of the second recording timer.  
If the blank time is less than 2 minutes, the second  
recording timer does not work.  
Example: When "TIMER2" is selected  
• When the power plug is disconnected or the  
power is cut, the recording timer settings may be  
lost. If the settings are lost, set the clock and  
recording timer again.  
Timer number  
3 Press  
4 Press  
.
,
or  
to set the  
starting time and ending time.  
Example: When you want to set the playback  
time from 7:00 a.m. to 7:30 a.m.  
You can use the number buttons to set the  
playback time. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
• For setting the clock, refer to "Setting the  
Clock" ( page 16).  
page 16).  
Entering the "hour" →  
"minute" →  
Entering the  
5 Press  
or  
to select  
"ONCE" or "EVERYDAY".  
ONCE  
: The playback timer works once.  
EVERYDAY : The playback timer works every  
day.  
6 Press  
7 Press  
"PLAY TIMER".  
.
or  
to select  
(Continued on next page)  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
(Continued)  
Using the Timers  
For the locations of remote control  
buttons, refer to page 46.  
8 Press  
.
10 Press  
11 Press  
.
9
Press  
or  
to select the  
or  
to adjust the  
sound source you want to play back.  
playback volume.  
Example: When you want to listen to an AM  
broadcast  
12 Press  
.
• The settings appear in the display window.  
13 When the main unit is turned on,  
press  
unit.  
to turn off the main  
• When you want to listen to sound from other  
equipment, you cannot use the playback  
timer function to start playback on any  
equipment other than this product.  
You cannot use the playback timer function  
together with program playback, repeat  
playback or random playback of a disc.  
• The playback timer is available only when  
the main unit is turned off.  
When you want to listen to an FM/AM radio  
broadcast  
NOTE  
• During operation, you can return to the previous  
• (With "FM" or "AM" selected) Press  
and then press or the num-  
ber buttons to select the preset number  
of the radio station whose broadcast you  
want to listen to ( page 20). Refer to  
,
step by pressing  
. You can quit the playback  
,
timer settings by pressing  
not stored.  
• When the playback timer starts, the volume  
gradually increases to the selected level.  
. The settings are  
"Using the number buttons"  
(
page 16).  
Canceling the playback timer  
function  
When you want to play back a DVD VIDEO  
or DVD AUDIO  
In step 2 on page 48, select the timer number you  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
twice. Regardless of the displayed num-  
bers of group (G) and track (T), you can  
play back a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO  
only from the beginning of the disc.  
want to cancel, and then press  
Even when you cancel the playback timer, the set-  
ting remains stored.  
.
When you want to play back a CD, VCD or  
Activating the playback timer again  
In step 2 on page 48, select the timer number you  
SVCD  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
want to activate, and then press  
repeatedly  
twice, and then press  
,
or the  
until all of the setting procedure finishes. Then turn  
off the main unit.  
number buttons to select the number of a  
track (T) from which you want to start  
playback. Refer to "Using the number  
NOTE  
• When you want to activate two or three playback  
timers, leave a blank time of 2 or more minutes  
between the ending time of the first playback timer  
and the starting time of the second playback timer.  
If the blank time is less than 2 minutes, the second  
playback timer does not work.  
buttons" (  
number (G) is ignored.  
page 16). The group  
When you want to specify a track from  
which you want to start playback on an MP3  
or WMA  
• When the power plug is disconnected or the  
power is cut, the playback timer settings may be  
lost. If the settings are lost, set the clock and  
playback timer again.  
• When you operate the playback timer with a DVD  
VIDEO, DVD AUDIO or VCD, sound and video  
may not be played back automatically. A DVD  
VIDEO, DVD AUDIO or VCD may contain a disc  
menu that appears first when played back.  
Sound or video will not come out before you  
select the desired item to be played back on the  
disc menu.  
• (With "DVD/CD" selected) Press  
press or the number buttons  
to select the group number (G) to be  
played back, press , and then press  
or the number buttons to  
,
,
,
select the track number (T) to be played  
back. Refer to "Using the number  
buttons" (  
page 16).  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Standby  
Disc Ejection Lock  
If no sound is produced for 3 minutes when the  
disc or cassette tape is selected as a sound  
source, the main unit automatically turns off.  
When the disc or cassette tape is selected  
as a sound source  
You can prohibit ejection of a disc.  
When the main unit is turned off  
While holding down , press  
the main unit.  
Press  
.
on  
"A. STANDBY" stands for "Auto Standby".  
Auto standby indicator  
Even if you press , "LOCKED" appears in the  
display window and the disc does not come out.  
In addition, when you press , while the main unit  
Auto standby performance  
When playback or recording finishes, auto standby  
starts the countdown (the "A. STANDBY" indicator  
flashes). When no operation is carried out within 3  
minutes, the main unit automatically turns off.  
When you start playback or recording within 3 min-  
utes, auto standby starts the countdown again  
after playback or recording finishes.  
When an operation other than playback and record-  
ing finishes and no operation is carried out within 3  
minutes, the main unit automatically turns off.  
"A. STANDBY OFF" indicator starts to flash 20  
seconds before the main unit is to turn off.  
is turned off, "LOCKED" appears in the display  
window and the main unit does not turn on.  
Canceling the disc ejection lock  
When the main unit is turned off  
Carry out the operation explained above once  
again.  
Canceling auto standby  
Press  
once again.  
NOTE  
• Leaving the volume at "0" is not the same as produc-  
ing no sound, and therefore does not start the auto  
standby function.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Using AV COMPU LINK  
The JVC AV COMPU LINK system allows you to  
enjoy video or audio with the simplest operation. If  
your JVC TV set supports the JVC AV COMPU  
LINK system, simply starting the main unit will  
automatically make all necessary settings on the  
TV to allow you to enjoy the playback.  
Operations  
You can enjoy sound or video simply by starting  
playback on the main unit. You do not have to  
select the input setting for the TV, or turn on the TV  
beforehand.  
Connection and Setting  
1 Turn on the main power to the TV.  
2 Insert a disc into the main unit.  
• Carefully read manuals of equipment to be  
connected.  
3 Press  
on the main unit.  
Audio cord with  
monaural mini-  
The following operation is performed auto-  
matically.  
plugs  
AV COMPU  
LINK -II or -III  
AV  
(not supplied)  
COMPU LINK  
• The TV set will be turned on.  
• TV input will be switched to external input  
(Video 1, 2 or 3) of the main unit.  
When you turn off the main unit, power to the  
TV is not turned off.  
JVC-made TV set  
Main unit  
Set the main unit's AV COMPU LINK MODE  
setting ( page 39) as follows.  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-1 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 2  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-2 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 3  
• When connecting to the VIDEO-3 input terminal  
of the TV: DVD 1  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Convenient Functions/Reference  
Handling Discs/Cassette Tapes  
Handling discs  
Cleaning the main unit cabinet  
• Do not put adhesive tape or stickers, or write on  
a disc.  
• Do not bend a disc.  
• Be sure not to use heart/flower shaped discs or  
other irregularly shaped discs. The use of such  
discs damages the main unit.  
• Gently dust the cabinet surface with a soft dry  
cloth. When the cabinet is very dirty, dampen the  
cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water,  
wring out the cloth well, and then wipe the cabi-  
net with the dampened cloth followed by a soft  
dry cloth.  
• Do not wipe the cabinet with thinners or ben-  
zenes. Wiping it with these agents may cause  
discoloration of the cabinet or removal of the  
paint. Do not spray insecticides or other highly  
volatile agents onto the cabinet. Do not leave  
pieces of rubber or plastic on the cabinet for a  
long period.  
Cleaning discs  
Signal surface  
Wipe a disc from the  
center outward with a  
soft cloth.  
Scratches concentrated  
on a certain part cause  
sound dropout.  
• Be sure not to use thinners, benzenes, cleaners  
for analog records, or other chemical agents.  
Handling cassette tapes  
• A slack tape may become  
caught in the inner part of  
the main unit and dam-  
age the main unit.  
Before using a cas-  
sette tape, wind up  
any slack in the cas-  
sette tape as shown  
on the right. Do not pull out the tape  
or touch the tape's surface.  
Cleaning the tape deck head  
• Clean the head, pinch rollers and capstans  
approximately every 10 hours of playback time  
before the volume falls or sound quality  
deteriorates  
Cotton-tipped  
swab moistened  
with alcohol  
Capstans  
Pinch roller  
Head  
Pinch roller  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Reference  
Disc Messages  
Disc message  
Meaning  
Possible solution  
Replace the disc.  
You are trying to play back an unplayable disc or  
a disc that has many scratches.  
CANNOT PLAY  
NO DISC  
No disc is loaded.  
NO AUDIO  
The disc may be an illegally copied disc.  
You cannot listen to the disc.  
You are playing back a multi-channel track for  
which down-mix is prohibited.  
LR ONLY  
This is normal operation.  
Troubleshooting  
Reference  
page  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Possible solution  
Improper connection.  
Connect all cords properly.  
11-15  
8
No sound/video is  
produced.  
Headphones are connected.  
Disconnect the headphone plug.  
The clock display is  
flashing.  
A power failure occured or the  
power plug was disconnected.  
Reset the clock.  
16  
21  
Place the disc on the disc tray with  
the letter-printed surface facing up.  
The disc is upside down.  
Disc playback does not  
start.  
Leave the main unit turned on, wait  
for approximately 1 or 2 hours, and  
then operate the main unit.  
Moisture has condensed on the  
lens.  
3
A certain point cannot be  
played back properly.  
The disc is scratched or dirty.  
The head or capstans are dirty.  
Clean or replace the disc.  
Clean the head or capstans.  
Cancel the write-protection.  
Connect an antenna.  
52  
52  
The volume of cassette  
tape playback is low.  
You cannot record a  
cassette tape.  
The cassette tape is write-  
protected.  
44  
A radio broadcast cannot  
be received.  
No antenna is connected.  
11, 12  
The main unit is located close to a  
TV, computer, or other electric  
appliance.  
A whirring noise is  
produced.  
Place the main unit away from a TV,  
computer, or other electric appliance.  
3
You cannot set the timer. You did not set the clock.  
The timer does not work. The main unit is turned on.  
Set the clock.  
16  
After setting the timer, turn off the  
main unit.  
47, 49  
You cannot operate the  
remote control.  
The remote control batteries are  
running low.  
Replace the batteries with new  
batteries.  
9
You cannot operate the  
main unit with the number The remote control mode selector Set the remote control mode selector  
16  
buttons on the remote  
control.  
on the remote control is set to TV. to AUDIO.  
When you turn on the  
main unit, a noise comes The internal cooling fan produces The noise is not a malfunction. This is  
13, 17  
out from the rear of the  
main unit.  
the noise as it rotates.  
to prevent excessive heat.  
If this product does not function properly even after you have implemented the possible  
solutions given above  
Many functions of this product are implemented by microcomputers. If malfunction is caused by  
thunder or static electricity, or the main unit does not function properly even when you press a  
button, disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet, wait for a while, and then connect this  
product again. Then reset the clock.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
DVD receiver (CA-UXQD9S)  
Amplifier  
General  
Output power 20 W + 20 W at 4  
(10% THD)  
Input terminals  
Power requirement AC 240 V , 50/60 Hz  
Power consumption 70 W (at operation)  
1.3 W (on standby)  
<Analog> AUX×1,  
Dimensions 165 mm (W) × 200 mm (H)  
× 355 mm (D)  
Mass (approx.) 4.6 kg  
500 mV/47 k  
:LEVEL1  
:LEVEL2  
250 mV/47 k  
Output terminals  
<Analog> Speaker×1, 20 W/4  
Impedance 4 - 16  
Headphone (×1), 25 mW/32  
Impedance 16 - 1 k  
Speaker (SP-UXQD9S)  
System 3-way bass reflex type,  
Magnetically shielded type  
Speakers Woofer: 10 cm × 1  
Midrange: 4 cm × 1  
<Digital> DVD/CD optical input × 1  
-23 dBm to -15 dBm  
(Optical square terminal)  
Tweeter: 1.5 cm × 1  
Powerhandling 20 W  
capacity  
<Other> AV COMPU LINK × 2 ( 3.5)  
φ
Tuner  
Impedance 4  
Frequency range 55 Hz - 40 kHz  
Sound pressure 85 dB/W•m  
level  
Dimensions 140 mm (W) × 231 mm (H)  
× 204.5 mm (D)  
Mass (approx.) 2.2 kg  
(1 unit)  
Frequency FM:87.50 MHz - 108.00 MHz  
AM:531 kHz - 1 710 kHz  
(9 kHz spacing)  
530 kHz - 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz spacing)  
DVD player  
Micro component system  
(UX-QD9S)  
Playable discs DVD VIDEO, DVD AUDIO,  
CD, VCD, SVCD, CD-R/CD-  
RW (CD, VCD, SVCD, MP3/  
WMA/JPEG format), DVD-R/  
DVD-RW (video format)  
General  
Dimensions 445 mm (W) × 231 mm (H)  
× 355 mm (D)  
Cassette deck  
Mass (approx.) 9.0 kg  
Frequency response  
Normal (type I) 60 Hz - 14 000 Hz  
Wow and flutter 0.15% (WRMS)  
• U.S. and foreign patents licensed from Dolby  
Laboratories.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EN, CS  
c
1004SKMMODJEM  
2004 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Intel Computer Hardware I 45C User Manual
Jacuzzi Hot Tub BP69 LH User Manual
JBL Car Amplifier A3000GTi User Manual
Jenn Air Cooktop CCGP2420P User Manual
John Deere Pressure Washer AC 3500GHH User Manual
JVC CRT Television AV32L2EU AV28L2EU AV32X10EU AV28X10EU AV28WH5EU User Manual
JVC DVD VCR Combo LPT0838 001C User Manual
KitchenAid Food Processor KFP1642 User Manual
Korg Electronic Keyboard Triton Studio User Manual
Kramer Electronics TV Cables PT 101Hxl User Manual